699667

Pioneer VSX-531D Manual

40
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/41
Next page
AV RECEIVER
Operating Instructions
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu).
VSX-531D
AV-VASTAANOTIN
Käyttöohjeet
Lue lisää tuotteen rekisteröimisen eduista verkossa: http://www.pioneer.eu
2
Sisällysluettelo
Kiitos tämän Pioneerin tuotteen ostamisesta.
Lue tämä käyttöohje huolellisesti, jotta osaat käyttää
laitetta oikein.
Ennen aloittamista ........................3
Pakkauksen sisältö ............................3
Vastaanottimen asentaminen ....................3
Asetusten määrittelyn järjestys ............3
1 Ohjaimet ja näytöt
Etulevy......................................4
Näyttö .....................................5
Kaukosäädin .................................6
Paristojen asentaminen .......................7
Kaukosäätimen kantama ......................7
2 Laitteiden kytkeminen
Kaiuttimien sijoittelu............................8
Vihjeitä kaiuttimien sijoitteluun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Kaiuttimien kytkeminen .........................9
Kaapelien kytkeminen .........................10
HDMI-kaapelit..............................10
Tietoa HDMI:stä ............................10
Analogiset audiokaapelit .....................11
Digitaaliset audiokaapelit .....................11
Vakiomalliset RCA-videokaapelit ...............11
Videolähtöjen kytkemisestä.....................11
TV:n ja soitettavien komponenttien kytkeminen .....12
Kytkennät HDMI-kaapelilla ....................12
Kytkennät laitteisiin ilman HDMI-liitäntää .........13
Antennien kytkeminen .........................14
Ulkoisten antennien käyttö ....................14
USB-laitteen kytkeminen .......................14
Vastaanottimen virtajohto ......................15
3 Perusasetukset
Surroundäänen automaattiset asetukset (MCACC) ..16
Ongelmia automaattisten asetusten käytössä .....17
4 Perussoitto
Soitto äänilähteestä...........................18
Audion tulosignaalin valitseminen ..............18
Soittaminen USB-laitteelta .....................20
Soiton perusohjaus..........................20
Kompressoidun audion yhteensopivuus..........20
Musiikin soitto langattomalla
BLUETOOTH-yhteydellä .......................21
Laitepari (alkurekisteröinti) ....................21
Kuuntele musiikkia BLUETOOTH-laitteelta .......21
Huomioi radioaalloista .......................21
FM-radion kuuntelu ...........................22
FM-äänenlaadun parantaminen ................22
Kanavien tallentaminen ......................22
Tallennettujen kanavien kuuntelu ...............22
Tallennettujen kanavien nimeäminen ............23
Johdanto RDS:ään ...........................23
RDS-ohjelmien haku ........................23
RDS-tiedon näyttäminen .....................24
Digitaalisen DAB-radion kuuntelu ................24
Vaihda kanavien näyttämisen järjestystä . . . . . . . . .24
DAB-radiotietojen näyttäminen.................24
5 Kuuntelu laitteistolla
Valitse kuuntelutila............................25
Automaattinen soitto.........................25
Kuuntelu surroundäänellä ....................25
Laajennetun surroundin käyttö .................26
Stream Directin käyttö .......................26
Advanced Sound Retrieverin käyttö ..............27
Parempi ääni Phase Controlilla ..................27
Audion asetuksien valitseminen .................27
Fixed PCM-asetuksien valikko ..................29
Televisionäytön tai graasen käyttöliittymän
muokkaaminen ..............................29
6 Kotivalikko
Kotivalikon käyttäminen........................30
Kaiuttimien manuaaliset asetukset ...............30
Kaiuttimien sijoittelu .........................30
X.Over ...................................31
Kanavan taso ..............................31
Kaiuttimien etäisyys .........................32
Tuloliitännän määrittelyvalikko...................32
Automaattisen virransäästön valikko..............32
HDMI-asetuksien valikko.......................33
DAB-asetuksien valikko........................34
DAB-haku .................................34
DAB DRC .................................34
7 Lisätietoa
Vianhaku ...................................35
Yleistä....................................35
HDMI ....................................36
Tärkeää tietoa HDMI-kytkennöistä ..............36
USB-viestit ................................36
Keskusyksikön nollaus ........................37
Laitteen puhdistaminen ........................37
Tekniset ominaisuudet.........................37
Tietoa ohjelmalisensseistä .....................39
3
Ennen aloittamista Asetusten määrittelyn järjestys
Tämä laite on monipuolinen AV-vastaanotin ja siinä on
runsaasti toimintoja ja liitäntöjä. Käyttö on kuitenkin
helppoa, kun noudatat seuraavia ohjeita kytkentöjen ja
asetusten tekemisessä.
Eri vaiheiden värit tarkoittavat:
Pakollinen asetus
Tee asetus tarpeen mukaan
1
Kaiuttimien kytkeminen
Kaiuttimien asettelulla on keskeinen merkitys
äänelle.
• Kaiuttimien asettelu (sivu 8).
• Kaiuttimien kytkeminen (sivu 9).
2
Komponenttien kytkeminen
Surroundäänen toistamiseksi kytke Blu-ray- tai
DVD-soitin digitaalisella yhteydellä.
• Videolähtöjen kytkeminen (sivu 11).
• TV:n ja soitettavien laitteiden kytkeminen
(sivu 12).
• Antennien kytkeminen (sivu 14).
• Virtajohdon kytkeminen (sivu 15).
3
Virta päälle
Varmista, että olet asettanut TV:lle videon
tuloliitännäksi tämän laitteen. Katso tarvittaessa
tietoa TV:n käyttöohjeesta.
4
Tee alkuasetukset asuinpaikkasi mukaan
• Muuta TV:n tai graasen käyttöliittymän asetuksia
(sivu 29).
Tarkista pakkauksen sisältö
Tarkista, että olet saanut kaikki lisävarusteet:
• Asennusmikrofoni
• Kaukosäädin
• AAA-paristot (IEC R03) x 2
• DAB/FM-lanka-antenni
• Pikaopas
• Turvaohje
* Tämä on ladattava tiedosto eikä se kuulu lisävarusteisiin
Vastaanottimen asentaminen
• Asenna laite tasaiselle ja vakaalle alustalle.
Älä asenna sitä seuraaviin paikkoihin:
- television päälle (kuvaan saattaa tulla häiriöitä)
- lähelle kasettinauhuria tai muuta laitetta, jolla on
magneettikenttä. Nämä saattavat häiritä ääntä.
- auringonvalolle alttiiksi
- kosteaan tai märkään paikkaan
- erittäin kylmään tai kuumaan paikkaan
- paikkaan, jossa on värinää tai muuta liikettä
- erittäin pölyiseen paikkaan
- paikkaan, jossa on kuumaa höyryä tai öljyä (kuten
keittiö)
5
Tuloliitännän määrittelyvalikko (sivu 32)
(Jos käytät muita kuin suositeltuja liitäntätapoja).
HDMI-asetuksien valikko (sivu 33)
(Kun kytketty TV tukee HDMI-audion
paluukanavatoimintoa).
6
Käytä näytöltä ohjattavaa Full Auto MCACC-
toimintoa järjestelmän asetuksille
• Automaattiset asetukset surroundäänellä
(MCACC) (sivu 16).
7
Perussoitto (sivu 18)
• Audion signaalitulon valinta (sivu 18).
• USB-laitteen soitto (sivu 20).
• Kuuntelutilan valinta (sivu 25).
8
Äänen säätäminen
• Advanced Sound Retrieverin käyttö (sivu 27).
• Parempi ääni Phase Controlilla (sivu 27).
• Audion asetuksien valitseminen (sivu 27).
• Kaiuttimien manuaaliset asetukset (sivu 30).
4
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
1
1
Ohjaimet ja näytöt
VSX-531D
AUX INPUT
SETUP MIC
34
1
5 726
8 10 1211 13 149
1
TULOLIITÄNNÄN VALITSINSÄÄDIN
Valitsee lähdetulon (sivu 18).
2 Vastaanottimen ohjainpainikkeet
SPEAKERS
– Kytkee kaiutinjärjestelmän päälle ja
pois. Kun valittuna on SP OFF, vastaanottimeen
kytketyistä kaiuttimista ei kuulu ääntä.
DIMMER
– Näyttöruudun kirkkauden säätö.
Valittavissa on neljä eri kirkkaustasoa.
STATUS
– Vaihtaa näyttöruudun sisällön. Valitessasi
lähdetulon voit nähdä sen tilan, äänenvoimakkuuden
ja liitännän nimen.
3 Merkkinäyttö
Katso sivu 5.
4 Virittimen ohjauspainikkeet
BAND
– Vaihtaa radiokaistaksi DAB, FM ST (stereo)
tai FM MONO (sivu 22).
TUNER EDIT
– Näppäimillä
TUNE
,
PRESET
ja
ENTER
tallennat muistiin ja nimeät
radioasemia (sivu 23).
TUNE
- Käytetään radiotaajuuksien haussa
(sivu 22).
Etulevy
PRESET
- Käytetään tallennettujen
radioasemien valitsemiseen (sivu 22).
5 HDMI merkkivalo
Vilkkuu kytkettäessä komponenetteja HDMI:llä. Palaa kun
kun komponentti on kytkeytynyt (sivu 12).
6 Kaukosäätimen sensori
Vastaanottaa signaalin kaukosäätimestä. (Katso
Kaukosäätimen kantama, sivu 7).
7
MASTER VOLUME
– Äänenvoimakkuuden
pääsäädin.
8
STANDBY/ON
– Virtakytkin
9 PHONES
Kytke tähän kuulokkeet. Kun kuulokkeet on kytketty,
kaiuttimista ei kuulu ääntä. Kuulokkeille voidaan valita
kuuntelutila PHONES SURR, STREO tai STEREO ALC.
10
AUX INPUT/SETUP MIC
Kytke muita laitteita stereominijakilla.
Kytke asennusmikrofoni, kun teet automaattista
asennusta Full Auto MCACC (sivu 16).
11
Kuuntelutilan valitsimet
AUTO SURROUND/STREAM DIRECT
– Valitsee
kuuntelutilaksi joko Auto Surround (sivu 25) tai
Stream Direct -soitto (sivu 26).
ALC/STANDARD SURR
– Painaminen valitsee
vakiodekoodauksen ja vaihtaa tilojen Pro Logic ja
NEO:6 sekä Auto level -stereotilan välillä (sivu 25).
ADVANCED SURROUND
– Vaihtaa erilaisten
surroundtilojen välillä (sivu 26).
12
ECO
Vaihtoehtoina ECO 1/ ECO 2. Kun ECO-tila on päällä,
näyttöruutu on pimeänä (sivu 26).
13
SOUND RETRIEVER
Kytkee Sound Retriever -efektin päälle ja pois.
14
USB-liitäntä
Kytke tähän USB-muistilaite äänilähteeksi (sivu 14).
5
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
Ohjaimet ja näytöt
1
1
Controls and displays
1
1
5
2
35
4
Display
15
PHASE
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 27).
16
AUTO
Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on
(page 25
).
17
Tuner indicators
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received
(page 23
). (For Europe)
ST – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode (page 22
).
TUNE – Lights when a normal broadcast channel.
PRESET – Shows when a preset radio station is
registered or called.
MEM – Blinks when a radio station is registered.
MHz – Lights when the character display is showing the
currently received FM broadcast frequency.
18
Speaker indicators
Shows if the speaker system is on or not (page 4).
SPA means the speakers are switched on.
SP means the speakers are switched off.
19
Sleep timer indicator
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 6).
20
PRESET information or input signal indicator
Shows the preset number of the tuner or the input signal
type, etc.
21
Character display
Displays various system information.
22
DTS indicators
DTS – Lights when a source with DTS encoded audio
signals is detected.
HD – Lights when a source with DTS-EXPRESS or DTS-
HD encoded audio signals is detected.
96/24 – Lights when a source with DTS 96/24 encoded
audio signals is detected.
NEO:6 – When one of the NEO:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate NEO:6 processing (page 25
).
23
Dolby Digital indicators
D – Lights when a Dolby Digital encoded signal is
detected.
D+ – Lights when a source with Dolby Digital Plus
encoded audio signals is detected.
HD – Lights when a source with Dolby TrueHD
encoded audio signals is detected.
PLII – Lights to indicate Pro Logic II decoding (see
Listening in surround sound
on page 25 for more on this).
24
ADV.S.
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been
selected (see Using the Advanced surround
on page 26 for
more on this).
25
SIGNAL SELECT indicators
DIGITAL – Lights when a digital audio signal is selected.
Blinks when a digital audio signal is selected and
selected audio input is not provided.
HDMI – Lights when an HDMI signal is selected. Blinks
when an HDMI signal is selected and selected HDMI
input is not provided.
26
DIR.
Lights when the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode is
switched on (page 26
).
15 16 17 18 19 17
22 23 24 25 25 26
20
21
15
PHASE
Palaa, kun Phase Control on päällä (sivu 27).
16
AUTO
Palaa, kun Auto Surround -ominaisuus on päällä
(sivu 25).
17
Virittimen merkkivalot
RDS – Palaa, kun vastaanotetaan RDS-lähetystä
(sivu 23).
ST – Palaa, kun FM-stereolähetystä vastaanotetaan
auto stereotilassa (sivu 22).
TUNE – Palaa vastaanotettaessa normaalia kanavaa.
PRESET – Ilmaisee tallennettavan tai ladattavan
radioaseman numeron.
MEM – Vilkkuu tallennettaessa radioasemaa.
MHz – Syttyy, kun merkkinäytössä on parhaillaan
vastaanotettavan FM-lähetyksen taajuus.
18
Kaiuttimien merkkivalo
Ilmaisee, ovatko kaiuttimet päällä vai ei (sivu 4).
SP A Kaiuttimet ovat päällä.
SP Kaiuttimet eivät ole päällä.
19
Uniajastimen merkkivalo
Syttyy, kun uniajastin on käytössä.
20
PRESET tietoa tai tulosignaalin ilmaisin
Näyttää virittimen tallennuksen numeron tai tulosignaalin
tyypin ym.
Näyttöruutu
21
Merkkinäyttö
Näyttää erilaisia tietoja järjestelmästä.
22
DTS-ilmaisimet
DTS – Syttyy, kun havaitaan äänilähde, josta tulee
DTS-koodattu audiosignaali.
HD - Syttyy, kun havaitaan äänilähde, josta tulee
DTS-EXPRESS- tai DTS-HD-koodattu audiosignaali.
96/24 - Syttyy, kun havaitaan äänilähde, josta tulee
DTS 96/24-koodattu audiosignaali
NEO:6 – Merkkivalo ilmaisee NEO:6-prosessoinnin,
kun jokin laitteen NEO:6-tiloista on päällä.
23
Dolby Digital-merkkivalot
D – Syttyy, kun havaitaan Dolby Digital -koodattu
signaali.
D+ – Syttyy, kun havaitaan Dolby Digital Plus
-koodattu audiosignaali.
HD – Syttyy, kun havaitaan Dolby True HD
-koodattu audiosignaali.
PLII – Syttyy, kun havaitaan Pro Logic
-dekoodaus. (Katso lisää kohdasta Kuuntelu
surroundäänen kanssa, sivu 25).
24
ADV.S.
Syttyy, kun valittuna on jokin Advanced Surround -tiloista.
(Katso lisää kohdasta Laajennetun surroundäänen käyttö,
sivu 26).
25
SIGNAL SELECT –merkkivalot
DIGITAL – Syttyy, kun valittuna on digitaalinen
audiosignaali. Vilkkuu, jos digitaalinen audiosignaali
on valittu, mutta valittua audiotuloa ei ole.
HDMI – Syttyy, kun HDMI-signaali on valittu. Vilkkuu,
jos HDMI-signaali on valittu, mutta valittua HDMI-tuloa
ei ole.
26
DIR
Syttyy, kun tila DIRECT tai PURE DIRECT on päällä
(sivu 26).
6
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
Ohjaimet ja näytöt
1
1
Controls and displays
1
1
6
2
35
4
Remote control
As for operating other devices, the remote control codes for
the Pioneer products are preset. The settings cannot be
changed.
1
Í
RECEIVER
Switches the receiver between standby and on.
2
Input function buttons
Use to select the input source to this receiver (page 18). This
will enable you to control other Pioneer components with the
remote control.
3
Sound control buttons
PHASE
– Press to switch on/off Phase Control
(page 27
).
S.RETRIEVER
– Press to restore CD quality sound to
compressed audio sources (page 27
).
4
Listening mode and component control buttons
AUTO/DIRECT
– Switches between Auto surround
mode (page 25
) and Stream Direct playback (page 26).
STEREO
– Press to select stereo playback (page 25).
ALC/STANDARD SURR
– Press for standard decoding
and to switch between the modes of Pro Logic II and
NEO:6, and the Auto level control stereo mode (page 25
).
ADV SURR
– Switches between the various surround
modes (page 26
).
ECO
– Switches between ECO 1/ECO 2. When ECO
Mode is turned ON, the display will go dark (page 26
).
5
Receiver control buttons
AV ADJUST
– Use to access the Audio options
(page 27
).
HOME MENU
– Press to access the Home Menu
(page 30
).
RETURN
– Use to return to the display immediately
previous when making settings
6
/
/
/
,
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound
system (page 30
).
7
USB
control buttons
Use to control the
USB
source. Operations other than USB
are not possible.
8
TUNER
control buttons
See Listening to FM Radio on page 22.
9
AUDIO SEL
Press to select the audio input signal of the component to
play back (page 18
).
10
BASS +/–
,
TRE +/–
Use to adjust Bass or Treble.
•
These controls are disabled when the listening mode is set
to DIRECT or PURE DIRECT.
•
When the front speaker is set at SMALL in the Speaker
Setting (or automatically via the Full Auto MCACC setup)
and the X.Over is set above 150 Hz, the subwoofer
channel level will be adjusted by pressing
BASS +/–
(page 31
).
11
MUTE
Mutes/unmutes the sound.
12
VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
13
SLEEP
Press to change the amount of time before the receiver
switches into standby (30 min – 60 min – 90 min – Off). You
can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing
SLEEP
once.
14
DIMMER
Dims or brightens the display. The brightness can be
controlled in four steps.
15
STATUS
Switches the display of this unit. The listening mode, sound
volume or input name can be checked by selecting an input
source.
RECEIVER AUDIO SEL
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BAND
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURN
SAT
STREAM BOX
BT AUDIO
DVD
TOP
MENU
TRE
BASS
VOLUME
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
4
3
5
7
6
8
9
10
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
Pioneerin kaukosäätimien ohjauskoodit ovat kiinteät
eikä niitä voi käyttää toisten laitteiden ohjaamiseen tai
muuttaa.
1
RECEIVER
Kytkee vastaanottimen valmiustilaan tai päälle.
2 Tuloliitäntöjen valitsimet
Valitse näillä vastaanottimen lähdetulo (sivu 18). Näin voit
ohjata kaukosäätimillä muita Pioneerin laitteita.
3 Äänen ohjausnäppäimet
PHASE
– Painaminen kytkee Phase Controlin päälle
ja pois (sivu 27).
S.RETRIEVER
– Painaminen elvyttää
kompressoitujen äänitiedostojen laatua CD-tasolle
(sivu 27).
4 Kuuntelutilan ja komponenttien ohjausnäppäimet
AUTO/DIRECT
- Vaihtaa soiton tilojen Auto surround
(sivu 25) ja Stream Direct välillä (sivu 26).
STEREO
– Painaminen valitsee stereosoiton
(sivu 25).
ALC/STANDARD SURR
– Painaminen valitsee
vakiodekoodauksen sekä vaihtaa tilojen Pro Logic
II, NEO:6 ja Auto level control välillä (sivu 25).
ADV SURR
– Vaihtaa erilaisten surround-tilojen välillä
(sivu 26).
ECO
– Vaihtaa ECO 1/ECO 2. Kun ECO-tila on
päällä, näyttöruutu on pimeänä (sivu 26).
5 Vastaanottimen ohjausnäppäimet
AV ADJUST
– Käytetään audion valintoihin (sivu 27).
HOME MENU
– Painaminen avaa kotivalikon (Home
Menu, sivu 30).
RETURN
– Palauttaa asetuksia tehtäessä edelliseen
näyttöruutuun.
6 ,
ENTER
Käytä nuolinäppäimiä surroundjärjestelmän ääniasetuksia
tehdessä (sivu 30).
Kaukosäädin
7
USB
:n ohjausnäppäimet
Käytetään
USB
-lähteen ohjaamiseen. Näillä ei voi tehdä
muita toimintoja.
8 Virittimen ohjausnäppäimet
Katso FM-radion kuuntelu, sivu 22.
9
AUDIO SEL
Valitse soitettava tulosignaali painamalla tätä (sivu 18).
10
BASS +/-
,
TRE +/-
Käytetään basson ja diskantin säätämiseen.
• Nämä eivät ole käytettävissä kun kuuntelutilana on
DIRECT tai PURE DIRECT.
• Kun kaiutinasetuksissa (tai automaattisesti Full
Auto MCACC-asennuksessa) etukaiuttimiksi on
valittu SMALL ja X.Over’in arvo on yli 150 Hz,
alataajuuskaiuttimen kanavan tasoa säädetään
painamalla
BASS +/-
(sivu 31).
11
MUTE
Mykistää ja palauttaa äänen.
12
VOLUME +/-
Käytetään kuunteluvoimakkuuden säätämiseen.
13
SLEEP
Säädä painamalla aika, jonka jälkeen vastaanotin menee
valmiustilaan (30 min - 60 min - 90 min - Off). Jäljellä
olevan ajan voit tarkistaa painamalla kerran
SLEEP
.
14
DIMMER
Himmentää tai kirkastaa näyttöruudun. Valittavissa on
neljä eri kirkkaustasoa.
15
STATUS
Vaihtaa näyttöruudun sisällön. Valitsemalla lähdetulon,
voit nähdä sen tilan, äänenvoimakkuuden ja liitännän
nimen.
7
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
1
Ohjaimet ja näytöt
1
Controls and displays
1
1
7
2
35
4
Loading the batteries
The batteries included with the unit are to check initial
operations; they may not last over a long period. We
recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.
WARNING
•
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other
excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a
heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode
or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of
batteries.
CAUTION
•
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
-
Never use new and old batteries together.
-
Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly
according to the marks in the battery case.
-
Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
-
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or environmental public
institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
-
When inserting the batteries, make sure not to damage
the springs on the battery’s (–) terminals. This can cause
batteries to leak or overheat.
Operating range of remote control
The remote control may not work properly if:
•
There are obstacles between the remote control and the
receiver’s remote sensor.
•
Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
•
The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
•
The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
30°
7 m
30°
Laitteen mukana tulee paristot, jotta voit alkuun
tarkistaa toimivuudet. Paristot eivät ehkä kestä kauan.
Suosittelemme pitkäkestoisia alkaliparistoja.
VAROITUS
• Älä käytä tai varastoi paristoja suorassa auringon-
valossa tai kuumassa paikassa, kuten autossa tai
lämmittimen lähellä. Kuumuus voi saada paristot
vuotamaan, ylikuumenemaan, räjähtämään tai
syttymään. Lisäksi paristojen ikä tai toiminta voivat
heikentyä.
TÄRKEÄ
• Vääränlainen paristojen käyttö voi johtaa niiden
vuotamiseen tai halkeamiseen. Noudata näitä ohjeita:
- Älä käytä uusia ja vanhoja paristoja yhdessä.
- Asenna paristojen plus- ja miinus-navat oikein päin
paristokotelon merkkien mukaisesti.
- Samanmuotoisilla paristoilla voi olla eri jännitteet.
Älä käytä erilaisia paristoja yhdessä.
- Noudata asianmukaisia ohjeita vanhojen ja käytettyjen
paristojen kierrättämisessä.
- Varo paristoja asentaessa, ettet vahingoita
miinusnavan jousia. Tämä voisi aiheuttaa paristojen
vuotamisen yai ylikuumenemisen.
Paristojen asentaminen Kaukosäätimen kantama
Kaukosäädin ei ehkä toimi oikein, jos
• Kaukosäätimen ja vastaanottimen sensorin välillä on
este.
• Vastaanottimen sensoriin osuu suora auringonvalo tai
uoresoiva valo.
• Vastaanotin on lähellä laitetta, josta lähtee
infrapunavaloa.
• Samanaikaisesti käytetään toista kaukosäädintä.
Controls and displays
1
1
7
2
35
4
Loading the batteries
The batteries included with the unit are to check initial
operations; they may not last over a long period. We
recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.
WARNING
•
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other
excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a
heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode
or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of
batteries.
CAUTION
•
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
-
Never use new and old batteries together.
-
Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly
according to the marks in the battery case.
-
Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
-
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or environmental public
institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
-
When inserting the batteries, make sure not to damage
the springs on the battery’s (–) terminals. This can cause
batteries to leak or overheat.
Operating range of remote control
The remote control may not work properly if:
•
There are obstacles between the remote control and the
receiver’s remote sensor.
•
Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
•
The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
•
The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
30°
7 m
30°
8
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
Vihjeitä kaiuttimien sijoitteluun
Kaiuttimien sijoittelulla huoneeseen on keskeinen merkitys äänen laatuun. Noudattamalla
näitä ohjeita saat järjestelmästäsi parhaan äänen.
• Alataajuuskaiutin voidaan sijoittaa lattialle. Muiden kaiuttimien paras sijoittelu on
korvien korkeudella kuuntelutilanteessa. Emme suosittele kaiuttimia lattialla (paitsi
alataajuuskaiutin) tai seinällä hyvin korkealla.
• Paras stereovaikutelma saadaan sijoittamalla etukaiuttimet 2–3 metrin etäisyydelle
toisistaan siten, että TV on niiden välissä ja kumpikin kaiutin on yhtä kaukana TV:stä
• Jos kaiuttimet sijoitetaan kuvaputkitelevision lähelle, käytä magneettisuojattuja
kaiuttimia tai sijoita kaiuttimet riittävän kauas televisiosta.
• Jos käytät keskikaiutinta, aseta etukaiuttimet laajempaan kulmaan. Ilman keskikaiutinta
aseta ne kapeampaan kulmaan.
• Sijoita keskikaiutin TV:n ylä- tai alapuolelle, niin että sen ääni paikantuu televisioon.
Varmista lisäksi, ettei keskikaiutin ole etukaiuttimien reunoista lähtevän linjan sisällä.
• Kaiuttimet tulee kääntää kohti kuuntelukohtaa. Kulma riippuu huoneen koosta. Isoissa
huoneissa kulma on pienempi.
• Surroundkaiuttimien oikea korkeus on juuri korvien yläpuolella. Kaiuttimien ei tule olla
toisiaan kohti. DVD-audiolle kaiuttimien tulisi olla enemmän kuuntelijan takana kuin
kotiteatterikäytössä.
• Älä sijoita surroundkaiuttimia kauemmaksi kuuntelukohdasta kuin etukaiuttimet, koska
tämä huonontaa surroundvaikutelmaa.
TÄRKEÄ
• Varmista kaikkien kaiuttimien tukeva sijoittelu. Tämä sekä parantaa äänen laatua
että pienentää riskiä kaiuttimien vahingoittumisesta niiden kaatuessa tai pudotessa
ulkoisten tärähdysten takia.
5.1 kanavan surroundjärjestelmä
Kaiuttimien sijoittelu
Pääset nauttimaan 5.1 surroundäänestä asentamalla etukaiuttimet vasemmalle ja
oikealle (L/R), keskikaiuttimen (C), surroundkaiuttimet vasemmalle ja oikealle (SL/SR)
sekä alataajuuskaiuttimen (SW).
Parhaan surroundäänen saat seuraavanlaisella sijoittelulla.
9
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
2
Connecting your equipment
2
2
9
2
35
4
Connecting the speakers
The receiver will work with just two stereo speakers (the front speakers in the diagram) but
using at least three speakers is recommended, and a complete setup is best for surround
sound.
Make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the right (R) terminal and the speaker on
the left to the left (L) terminal. Also make sure the positive and negative (+/–) terminals on the
receiver match those on the speakers.
You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω.
Be sure to complete all connections before connecting this unit to the AC power source.
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
•
These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
before touching any uninsulated parts.
•
Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the
power to cut off as a safety measure.
Front speaker terminals:
1
Twist exposed wire strands together.
2
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
3
Tighten terminal.
Center and surround speaker terminals:
1
Twist exposed wire strands together.
2
Push open the tabs and insert exposed wire.
3
Release the tabs.
12 3
12 mm
12 3
12 mm
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Center
Surround right
Front right
Front leftSubwoofer
Surround left
Connecting your equipment
2
2
9
2
35
4
Connecting the speakers
The receiver will work with just two stereo speakers (the front speakers in the diagram) but
using at least three speakers is recommended, and a complete setup is best for surround
sound.
Make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the right (R) terminal and the speaker on
the left to the left (L) terminal. Also make sure the positive and negative (+/–) terminals on the
receiver match those on the speakers.
You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω.
Be sure to complete all connections before connecting this unit to the AC power source.
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
•
These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
before touching any uninsulated parts.
•
Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the
power to cut off as a safety measure.
Front speaker terminals:
1
Twist exposed wire strands together.
2
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
3
Tighten terminal.
Center and surround speaker terminals:
1
Twist exposed wire strands together.
2
Push open the tabs and insert exposed wire.
3
Release the tabs.
12 3
12 mm
12 3
12 mm
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Center
Surround right
Front right
Front leftSubwoofer
Surround left
Kaiuttimien kytkeminen
Laite toimii kahden stereokaiuttimenkin kanssa (kuvassa etukaiuttimet), mutta
suosittelemme vähintään kolmea kaiutinta, ja surroundäänelle paras vaihtoehto on täysi
asennus.
Varmista, että kytket oikeanpuoleisen kaiuttimen liitäntään R ja vasemmanpuoleisen
liitäntään L. Varmista myös, että vastaanottimen positiivinen ja negatiivinen (+/-) liitäntä
kytketään kaiuttimessa samalla tavoin.
Kaiuttimien nimellinen impedanssi saa olla 6–16 Ω.
Tee kaikki kytkennät ennen virtajohdon kytkemistä seinäpistokkeeseen.
Paljaan johdon kytkennät
Etukaiuttimien liittimet
1 Kierrä paljaaksi kuoritut
johtimet yhteen.
2 Avaa liitintä ja asenna johto.
3 Kierrä liitin kiinni.
Keski- ja surroundlaiuttimien liittimet
1 Kierrä paljaaksi kuoritut
johtimet yhteen
2 Avaa kielekkeet ja asenna johto.
3 Sulje kielekkeet.
TÄRKEÄ
• Kaiutinliitännöistä lähtee VAARALLINEN JÄNNITE. Varo sähköiskua kytkiessäsi tai
irrottaessasi kaiutinjohtoja: irrota virtajohto seinäkoskettimesta ennen eristämättömiin
osiin koskemista.
• Varmista, että paljaat kaiutinjohdon päät on kierretty yhteen ja asennettu kokonaan
liittimeen. Jos jokin paljaan johdon osa koskettaa takalevyä, virta saattaa sammua
turvatoimenpiteenä.
Etu vasenEtu oikea
Alataajuuskaiutin
Keski
Surround oikea Surround vasen
10
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
Connecting your equipment
2
2
10
2
35
4
Making cable connections
Make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit (as
shown in the illustration). If this happens, the magnetic field
produced by the transformers in this unit may cause a
humming noise from the speakers.
Important
•
Before making or changing connections, switch off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
•
Before unplugging the power cord, switch the power into
standby.
HDMI cables
Both video and sound signals can be transmitted
simultaneously with one cable. If connecting the player and
the TV via this receiver, for both connections, use HDMI
cables.
Be careful to connect the terminal in the proper direction.
Note
•
Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 27 to THRU (THROUGH) and set the input signal in
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18 to HDMI, if you
want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
•
If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try
adjusting the resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such as video game
units) have resolutions that may not be displayed. In this
case, use a (analog) composite connection.
•
When the video signal from the HDMI is 480i, 480p, 576i
or 576p, Multi Ch PCM sound and HD sound cannot be
received.
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video,
as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including DVD-
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations),
Video CD/Super VCD and CD.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI
®
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through
HDMI connections.
•
Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
•
3D signal transfer
•
Deep Color signal transfer
•
x.v.Color signal transfer
•
Audio Return Channel (see The HDMI Setup menu on
page 33)
•
Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals
(192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
•
Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio
(Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD,
SACD (DSD 2 ch only), Video CD, Super VCD
•
4K signal transfer
– This may not operate properly, depending on the
connected equipment.
– 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are
supported.
•
HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal
Note
•
Use a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable. If HDMI cable other
than a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable is used, it may not
work properly.
•
When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is
connected, it may not operate properly.
•
3D, Deep Color, x.v.Color, 4K signal transfer and Audio
Return Channel are only possible when connected to a
compatible component.
•
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer
time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio
may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
•
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI
OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/
connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause
noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
HDMI
®
Connecting your equipment
2
2
10
2
35
4
Making cable connections
Make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit (as
shown in the illustration). If this happens, the magnetic field
produced by the transformers in this unit may cause a
humming noise from the speakers.
Important
•
Before making or changing connections, switch off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
•
Before unplugging the power cord, switch the power into
standby.
HDMI cables
Both video and sound signals can be transmitted
simultaneously with one cable. If connecting the player and
the TV via this receiver, for both connections, use HDMI
cables.
Be careful to connect the terminal in the proper direction.
Note
•
Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 27 to THRU (THROUGH) and set the input signal in
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18 to HDMI, if you
want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
•
If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try
adjusting the resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such as video game
units) have resolutions that may not be displayed. In this
case, use a (analog) composite connection.
•
When the video signal from the HDMI is 480i, 480p, 576i
or 576p, Multi Ch PCM sound and HD sound cannot be
received.
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video,
as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including DVD-
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations),
Video CD/Super VCD and CD.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI
®
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through
HDMI connections.
•
Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
•
3D signal transfer
•
Deep Color signal transfer
•
x.v.Color signal transfer
•
Audio Return Channel (see The HDMI Setup menu on
page 33)
•
Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals
(192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
•
Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio
(Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD,
SACD (DSD 2 ch only), Video CD, Super VCD
•
4K signal transfer
– This may not operate properly, depending on the
connected equipment.
– 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are
supported.
•
HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal
Note
•
Use a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable. If HDMI cable other
than a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable is used, it may not
work properly.
•
When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is
connected, it may not operate properly.
•
3D, Deep Color, x.v.Color, 4K signal transfer and Audio
Return Channel are only possible when connected to a
compatible component.
•
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer
time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio
may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
•
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI
OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/
connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause
noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
HDMI
®
Connecting your equipment
2
2
10
2
35
4
Making cable connections
Make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit (as
shown in the illustration). If this happens, the magnetic field
produced by the transformers in this unit may cause a
humming noise from the speakers.
Important
•
Before making or changing connections, switch off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
•
Before unplugging the power cord, switch the power into
standby.
HDMI cables
Both video and sound signals can be transmitted
simultaneously with one cable. If connecting the player and
the TV via this receiver, for both connections, use HDMI
cables.
Be careful to connect the terminal in the proper direction.
Note
•
Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 27 to THRU (THROUGH) and set the input signal in
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18 to HDMI, if you
want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
•
If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try
adjusting the resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such as video game
units) have resolutions that may not be displayed. In this
case, use a (analog) composite connection.
•
When the video signal from the HDMI is 480i, 480p, 576i
or 576p, Multi Ch PCM sound and HD sound cannot be
received.
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video,
as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including DVD-
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations),
Video CD/Super VCD and CD.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI
®
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through
HDMI connections.
•
Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
•
3D signal transfer
•
Deep Color signal transfer
•
x.v.Color signal transfer
•
Audio Return Channel (see The HDMI Setup menu on
page 33)
•
Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals
(192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
•
Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio
(Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD,
SACD (DSD 2 ch only), Video CD, Super VCD
•
4K signal transfer
– This may not operate properly, depending on the
connected equipment.
– 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are
supported.
•
HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal
Note
•
Use a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable. If HDMI cable other
than a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable is used, it may not
work properly.
•
When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is
connected, it may not operate properly.
•
3D, Deep Color, x.v.Color, 4K signal transfer and Audio
Return Channel are only possible when connected to a
compatible component.
•
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer
time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio
may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
•
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI
OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/
connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause
noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
HDMI
®
Connecting your equipment
2
2
10
2
35
4
Making cable connections
Make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit (as
shown in the illustration). If this happens, the magnetic field
produced by the transformers in this unit may cause a
humming noise from the speakers.
Important
•
Before making or changing connections, switch off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
•
Before unplugging the power cord, switch the power into
standby.
HDMI cables
Both video and sound signals can be transmitted
simultaneously with one cable. If connecting the player and
the TV via this receiver, for both connections, use HDMI
cables.
Be careful to connect the terminal in the proper direction.
Note
•
Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 27 to THRU (THROUGH) and set the input signal in
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18 to HDMI, if you
want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
•
If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try
adjusting the resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such as video game
units) have resolutions that may not be displayed. In this
case, use a (analog) composite connection.
•
When the video signal from the HDMI is 480i, 480p, 576i
or 576p, Multi Ch PCM sound and HD sound cannot be
received.
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video,
as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including DVD-
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations),
Video CD/Super VCD and CD.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI
®
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through
HDMI connections.
•
Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
•
3D signal transfer
•
Deep Color signal transfer
•
x.v.Color signal transfer
•
Audio Return Channel (see The HDMI Setup menu on
page 33)
•
Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals
(192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
•
Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio
(Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD,
SACD (DSD 2 ch only), Video CD, Super VCD
•
4K signal transfer
– This may not operate properly, depending on the
connected equipment.
– 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are
supported.
•
HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal
Note
•
Use a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable. If HDMI cable other
than a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable is used, it may not
work properly.
•
When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is
connected, it may not operate properly.
•
3D, Deep Color, x.v.Color, 4K signal transfer and Audio
Return Channel are only possible when connected to a
compatible component.
•
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer
time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio
may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
•
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI
OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/
connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause
noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
HDMI
®
Kaapelien kytkemisestä
Varmista, että kaapelit eivät kulje laitteen päältä kuvan
osoittamalla tavalla. Jos näin käy, laitteen muuntajan
magneettikenttä voi aiheuttaa hurinan kuulumista
kaiuttimista.
Tärkeä
• Irrota virtajohto seinäkoskettimesta ennen kytkentöjen
tekemistä tai muuttamista.
• Kytke laite valmiustilaan ennen virtajohdon irrottamista.
HDMI-kaapelit
Yhdellä kaapelilla voi siirtää samanaikaisesti sekä kuva-
että äänisignaalit. Jos kytket soittimen ja TV:n toisiinsa
tämän vastaanottimen kautta, käytä HDMI-kaapelia
molempiin kytkentöihin.
Ole huolellinen ja kytke liitin oikein päin.
Huomio
• Jos haluat HDMI-audion kuluvan TV:sta, aseta HDMI:n
asetus kohdassa Audion asetuksien valitseminen (sivu
27) tilaan THRU ja tuloliitännän asetukseksi HDMI
kohdassa Audion tulosignaalin valitseminen (sivu 18).
Tällöin vastaanottimen kautta ei kuulu ääntä.
• Jos TV:ssa ei näy videosignaalia, kokeile sen tai
liittämäsi laitteen resoluution vaihtamista. Huomioi, että
joillakin laitteilla (kuten pelikoneilla) on resoluutioita,
joita ei voi näyttää. Tällaisessa tapauksessa käytä
kytkemiseen analogista komposiittiliitäntää.
• Jos HDMI-videosignaali on 480i, 480p, 576i tai 576p,
monikanavaista PCM-ääntä tai HD-ääntä ei oteta
vastaan.
Tietoa HDMI:stä
HDMI-kytkentä siirtää kompressoimatonta digitaalista
videota sekä melkein kaikkia digitaalisia audioformaatteja,
jotka ovat yhteensopivia kytketyn laitteen kanssa, kuten
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (katso poikkeukset
jäljempänä), Video CD/Super VCD ja CD.
Tämä vastaanotin sisältää High-Denition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI)-teknologiaa.
Vastaanotin tukee seuraavia toimintoja HDMI-kytkennän
kautta:
• Kompressoimattoman videon digitaalinen siirto
(HDCP:lla suojattu sisältö (1080p/24, 1080p/60 jne.))
• 3D-signaalin siirto
• Deep Color-signaalin siirto
• x.v.Color-signaalin siirto
• Audion paluukanava (Audio Return Channel,
ks. HDMI-asetuksien valikko, sivu 33)
• Monikanavaisen lineaarisen digitaalisen
PCM-audiosignaalin (192 kHz tai vähemmän) tulo aina
8 kanavalle asti.
• Seuraavien digitaalisten audioformaattien tulo:
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio),
DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD, vain 2 kanavaa),
Video CD, Super VCD.
• 4K-signaalin siirto
- Kytketyistä laitteista riippuen, tämä ei aina toimi
kunnolla.
- Tuetut signaalit: 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p ja
4K 60p.
• HDCP 2.2-yhteensopiva liitäntä.
Huomio
• Käytä High Speed HDMI-kaapelia. Jos käytät
muunlaista HDMI-kaapelia, se ei ehkä toimi kunnolla.
• HDMI-kaapeli sisäänrakennetulla ekvalisaattorilla ei
ehkä toimi kunnolla.
• 3D, Deep Color, x.v.Color ja 4K-signaalin siirto
sekä Audio Return Channel ovat mahdollisia vain
yhteensopivien laitteiden välillä.
• Digitaalisen audiosiirron tunnistaminen HDMI-
formaatissa saattaa kestää vähän aikaa. Siksi audiossa
saattaa olla katkos formaattia vaihdettaessa tai soiton
alussa.
• Jos soiton aikana kytket tämän vastaanottimen HDMI
OUT -liitännästä yhdistetyn laitteen päälle tai pois tai
irrotat HDMI-kaapelin, voi kuulua häiriöitä tai audio
keskeytyy.
HDMI ja HDMI High-Denition Multimedia Interface sekä
logo HDMI ovat HDMI Licencing,LLC:n tuotemerkkejä
tai rekisteröityjä tuotemerkkejä Yhdysvalloissa ja muissa
maissa.
x.v. Color ja ovat Sony Corporationin
tuotemerkkejä.
11
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
Connecting your equipment
2
2
11
2
35
4
Analog audio cables
Use stereo RCA phono cables to connect analog audio
components. These cables are typically red and white, and
you should connect the red plugs to R (right) terminals and
white plugs to L (left) terminals.
Digital audio cables
Commercially available coaxial digital audio cables or optical
cables should be used to connect digital components to this
receiver.
Note
•
When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting
the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical
socket.
•
When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be
damaged if bent around sharp corners.
•
You can also use a standard RCA video cable for coaxial
digital connections.
Standard RCA video cables
These cables are the most common type of video connection
and are used to connect to the composite video terminals.
The yellow plugs distinguish them from cables for audio.
About video outputs connection
This receiver is not loaded with a video converter. When you
use HDMI cables for connecting to the input device, the
same cables should be used for connecting to the TV.
The signals input from the analog (composite) video inputs of
this unit will not be output from the HDMI OUT.
L
R
AUDIO
White (Left)
Red (Right)
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
IN
Coaxial digital
audio cable
Optical cable
VIDEO
Yellow
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
IN
HDMI
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Playback component
TV
The OSD will
not appear.
Video signals can be output.
Connecting your equipment
2
2
11
2
35
4
Analog audio cables
Use stereo RCA phono cables to connect analog audio
components. These cables are typically red and white, and
you should connect the red plugs to R (right) terminals and
white plugs to L (left) terminals.
Digital audio cables
Commercially available coaxial digital audio cables or optical
cables should be used to connect digital components to this
receiver.
Note
•
When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting
the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical
socket.
•
When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be
damaged if bent around sharp corners.
•
You can also use a standard RCA video cable for coaxial
digital connections.
Standard RCA video cables
These cables are the most common type of video connection
and are used to connect to the composite video terminals.
The yellow plugs distinguish them from cables for audio.
About video outputs connection
This receiver is not loaded with a video converter. When you
use HDMI cables for connecting to the input device, the
same cables should be used for connecting to the TV.
The signals input from the analog (composite) video inputs of
this unit will not be output from the HDMI OUT.
L
R
AUDIO
White (Left)
Red (Right)
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
IN
Coaxial digital
audio cable
Optical cable
VIDEO
Yellow
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
IN
HDMI
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Playback component
TV
The OSD will
not appear.
Video signals can be output.
Videon lähtöliitännöistä
Tämä vastaanotin ei sisällä videokonvertteria.
Jos tulevalle signaalille on käytetty HDMI-kaapelia,
samanlaista tulee käyttää kytkennälle televisioon.
Analogiseen (komposiitti)tuloon tuleva videosignaali ei
lähde HDMI OUT -liitännästä.
Analogiset audiojohdot
Käytä RCA-stereokaapeleita analogisten audio-
komponenettien kytkemiseen. Kaapelit ovat tyypillisesti
punainen ja valkoinen, ja punainen liitin kytketään
oikeaan (R) liitäntään, valkoinen vasempaan (L).
Digitaaliset audiojohdot
Kaupasta saatavia koaksiaalisia digitaalisia audiojohtoja
tai optisia kaapeleita käytetään digitaalisten laitteiden
kytkemiseen vastaanottimeen.
Huomio
• Ole varovainen optista kaapelia kytkiessä, ettet
vahingoita liitintä suojaavaa suljinta.
• Varastoi optiset kaapelit väljästi kerittynä. Kaapeli voi
vahingoittua, jos sitä taivutetaan jyrkästi.
• Vakiomallista RCA-videokaapelia voi myös käyttää
koaksiaalisessa digitaalisessa kytkennässä.
Punainen
(Oikea)
Valkoinen
(Vasen)
Connecting your equipment
2
2
11
2
35
4
Analog audio cables
Use stereo RCA phono cables to connect analog audio
components. These cables are typically red and white, and
you should connect the red plugs to R (right) terminals and
white plugs to L (left) terminals.
Digital audio cables
Commercially available coaxial digital audio cables or optical
cables should be used to connect digital components to this
receiver.
Note
•
When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting
the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical
socket.
•
When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be
damaged if bent around sharp corners.
•
You can also use a standard RCA video cable for coaxial
digital connections.
Standard RCA video cables
These cables are the most common type of video connection
and are used to connect to the composite video terminals.
The yellow plugs distinguish them from cables for audio.
About video outputs connection
This receiver is not loaded with a video converter. When you
use HDMI cables for connecting to the input device, the
same cables should be used for connecting to the TV.
The signals input from the analog (composite) video inputs of
this unit will not be output from the HDMI OUT.
L
R
AUDIO
White (Left)
Red (Right)
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
IN
Coaxial digital
audio cable
Optical cable
VIDEO
Yellow
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
IN
HDMI
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Playback component
TV
The OSD will
not appear.
Video signals can be output.
Optinen kaapeli
Koaksiaalinen
digitaalinen
audiojohto
Vakiomallinen RCA-videokaapeli
Nämä kaapelit ovat yleisimpiä videokytkennöissä ja niitä
käytetään komposiittivideoliitäntöjen välillä. Erotuksena
audiojohdosta liittimen väri on keltainen.
Connecting your equipment
2
2
11
2
35
4
Analog audio cables
Use stereo RCA phono cables to connect analog audio
components. These cables are typically red and white, and
you should connect the red plugs to R (right) terminals and
white plugs to L (left) terminals.
Digital audio cables
Commercially available coaxial digital audio cables or optical
cables should be used to connect digital components to this
receiver.
Note
•
When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting
the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical
socket.
•
When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be
damaged if bent around sharp corners.
•
You can also use a standard RCA video cable for coaxial
digital connections.
Standard RCA video cables
These cables are the most common type of video connection
and are used to connect to the composite video terminals.
The yellow plugs distinguish them from cables for audio.
About video outputs connection
This receiver is not loaded with a video converter. When you
use HDMI cables for connecting to the input device, the
same cables should be used for connecting to the TV.
The signals input from the analog (composite) video inputs of
this unit will not be output from the HDMI OUT.
L
R
AUDIO
White (Left)
Red (Right)
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
IN
Coaxial digital
audio cable
Optical cable
VIDEO
Yellow
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
IN
HDMI
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Playback component
TV
The OSD will
not appear.
Video signals can be output.
Keltainen
Tuloliitännän tyyppi
Lähtöliitäntä
televisioon
OSD ei näy
Videosignaali voidaan lähettää
Soitettava laite
12
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
Connecting your equipment
2
2
12
2
35
4
Connecting a TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.), you can connect it to
this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
•
The following connection/setting is required to listen to the
sound of the TV over this receiver.
-
If the TV does not support the HDMI Audio Return
Channel function, connect the receiver and TV with
audio cables (as shown).
-
If the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel
function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via
the HDMI terminal, so there is no need to connect an
audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON
(see The HDMI Setup menu
on page 33).
-
Please refer to the TV’s operation manual for directions
on connections and setup for the TV.
Important
•
When the ARC function is ON and the receiver is
connected to a compatible TV with an HDMI cable, and
you switch the input of the TV to composite, the input of the
receiver may automatically switch to TV. If this happens,
switch the receiver’s input back to the original input, or turn
OFF the ARC function (see The HDMI Setup menu
on
page 33).
Note
•
In order to listen to the audio from the TV that is connected
to this receiver using an analog audio cables, set-up for
analog audio input is required (see The Input Assign menu
on page 32).
HDMI IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
OPTICAL
RL
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
HDMI OUTHDMI OUT HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
Select one
HDMI/DVI-compatible TV
Blu-ray Disc /DVD
player
Set-top box
Game console
HDMI/DVI-compatible components
If the TV does not support
the HDMI Audio Return
Channel function, this
connection is required to
listen to the TV sound over
the receiver.
OSD can only be
output from HDMI.
Streaming media player
TV:n ja soitettavien komponenttien
kytkeminen
Kytkentä HDMI:n kanssa
Jos sinulla on HDMI:llä tai DVI:llä (HDCP:n kera)
varustettu komponentti (Blu-ray-soitin ym.), kytke se
tähän vastaanottimeen HDMI-kaapelilla.
• Seuraavanlaiset kytkennät ja asetukset tarvitaan TV:n
äänen kuunteluun vastaanottimen kautta.
- Jos TV ei tue HDMI Audio Return Channel -toimintoa,
kytke laitteet toisiinsa audiokaapeleilla kuten kuvassa.
- Jos TV tukee HDMI Audio Return Channel -toimintoa,
sen ääni siirretään vastaanottimeen HDMI-liitännän
kautta, eikä audiokaapelia tarvita. Tällöin aseta HDMI-
asetuksien valikossa ARC tilaan ON (katso HDMI-
asetuksien valikko, sivu 33)
- Katso lisää kytkennöistä TV:n käyttöohjeesta.
Tärkeä
• Kun ARC-toiminto on tilassa ON ja vastaanotin ja TV
on kytketty toisiinsa HDMI-kaapelilla, TV:n tuloliitännän
vaihtaminen komposiitiksi saattaa automaattisesti
vaihtaa vastaanottimen tuloliitännäksi TV. Jos näin
käy, vaihda vastaanottimen tuloliitäntä takaisin
alkuperäiseksi tai kytke ARC-toiminto pois päältä (katso
HDMI-asetuksien valikko, sivu 33).
Huomio
• Jos haluat kuunnella analogisella audiojohdolla kytketyn
TV:n ääntä vastaanottimen kautta, sinun on tehtävä
asetukset analogisen audion tulolle (katso Tuloliitännän
määrittelyvalikko, sivu 32).
Jos TV ei tue HDMI
Audio Return Channel
-toimintoa, tarvitaan
tämä kytkentä TV:n
äänen kuunteluun.
HDMI/DVI-yhteensopivat komponentit
Blu-ray/DVD-soitin SuoratoistolaiteDigiboksi Pelikonsoli
OSD lähtee vain
HDMI:n kautta.
HDMI/DVI-yhteensopiva TV
Valitse toinen
13
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
Connecting your equipment
2
2
13
2
35
4
Connecting your component with no HDMI
terminal
This diagram shows connections of a TV and
Blu-ray Disc/
DVD
player (or other playback component) with no HDMI terminal to
the receiver.
Important
•
When the receiver and TV are connected by composite
cable, the OSD function allowing display of the receiver’s
settings, operations, etc., on the TV’s screen cannot be
used. In this case, watch the receiver’s front panel display
while performing the various operations and making
settings.
Note
•
You can only connect one component to the optical input
terminal. If connecting other devices, please use a
different method to connect the audio.
In order to listen to the audio from the source component
that is connected to this receiver using an optical cable,
first, switch to the
BD/DVD
(
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
) or
CBL/SAT
(set-top box), then press
AUDIO SEL
to choose
the audio signal
O1
(OPTICAL1) (see Selecting the audio
input signal on page 18).
•
You can only connect one component to the coaxial input
terminal. If connecting other devices, please use a
different method to connect the audio.
In order to listen to the audio from the source component
that is connected to this receiver using a coaxial cable, first,
switch to the
BD/DVD
(
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
) or
CBL/
SAT
(set-top box), then press
AUDIO SEL
to choose the
audio signal
C1
(COAXIAL1) (see Selecting the audio input
signal on page 18).
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
RL
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
RL
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
OPTICAL
RL
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Select one
TV
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
Select one
This connection is
required in order
to listen to the
sound of the TV
over the receiver.
Select one
Set-top box
OSD cannot be output.
Kytke komponentti ilman HDMI-liitäntää
Tämä kaavio näyttää kytkennät vastaanottimen ja
TV:n tai Blu-ray/DVD-soittimen (tai muun toistettavan
komponentin) välillä ilman HDMI-liitäntää.
Tärkeä
• Kun vastaanotin ja TV on kytketty komposiittikaapelilla,
TV:n ruudussa ei voi näyttää valikkoa, jossa
ovat asetukset ja toiminnot (OSD). Katso tällöin
vastaanottimen etulevyn näyttöruudusta asetuksien
arvot ja tilat.
Huomio
• Optiseen tuloliitäntään voi kytkeä vain yhden laitteen.
Jos kytket muita laitteita, käytä muita menetelmiä
audion kytkemiseen.
Voit kuunnella optisella liitännällä kytketyn laitteen
audiota valitsemalla ensin BD/DVD (Blu-ray/DVD-soitin)
tai CBL/SAT (digiboksi) ja valitsemalla näppäimestä
AUDIO SEL
signaaliksi O1 (OPTICAL1) (katso Audion
tulosignaalin valitseminen, sivu 18).
• Koaksiaalituloliitäntään voi kytkeä vain yhden laitteen.
Jos kytket muita laitteita, käytä muita menetelmiä
audion kytkemiseen.
Voit kuunnella koaksiaaliliitännällä kytketyn laitteen
audiota valitsemalla ensin BD/DVD (Blu-ray/DVD-soitin)
tai CBL/SAT (digiboksi) ja valitsemalla näppäimestä
AUDIO SEL
signaaliksi C1 (COAXIAL1) (katso Audion
tulosignaalin valitseminen, sivu 18).
Valitse toinen
Valitse toinenValitse toinen
Blu-ray/DVD-soitin Digiboksi
Tämä kytkentä
tarvitaan
TV:n äänen
kuuntelemiseen
vastaanottimella
OSD ei näy
14
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
Connecting your equipment
2
2
14
2
35
4
Connecting antennas
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna as shown below. To
improve reception and sound quality, connect external
antennas (see Using external antennas
below).
1
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna into the DAB/FM
antenna socket.
For best results, extend the DAB/FM wire antenna fully and
fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled
up.
Using external antennas
To improve FM reception
Use a PAL connector (not supplied) to connect an external
DAB/FM wire antenna.
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
…
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of
this receiver.
•
It is not possible to connect an iPod
®
/iPhone
®
or a similar
device to this receiver and play back music files.
•
This receiver does not support a USB hub.
•
For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a
USB device on page 20.
75 Ω coaxial cable
One-touch PAL
connector
USB mass
storage device
This receiver
Connecting your equipment
2
2
14
2
35
4
Connecting antennas
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna as shown below. To
improve reception and sound quality, connect external
antennas (see Using external antennas
below).
1
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna into the DAB/FM
antenna socket.
For best results, extend the DAB/FM wire antenna fully and
fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled
up.
Using external antennas
To improve FM reception
Use a PAL connector (not supplied) to connect an external
DAB/FM wire antenna.
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
…
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of
this receiver.
•
It is not possible to connect an iPod
®
/iPhone
®
or a similar
device to this receiver and play back music files.
•
This receiver does not support a USB hub.
•
For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a
USB device on page 20.
75 Ω coaxial cable
One-touch PAL
connector
USB mass
storage device
This receiver
Antennien kytkeminen
Kytke DABs/FM-lanka-antenni kuvan osoittamalla tavalla.
Kytke ulkoinen antenni parantamaan vastaanottoa ja
äänen laatua (katso jäljempää Ulkoisen antennin käyttö).
1 Kytke DAB/FM-lanka-antenni sille nimettyyn
liittäntään.
Saat parhaat tulokset, kun avaat DAB/FM-lanka-antennin
kokonaan ja kiinnität sen seinään tai oven karmiin. Älä
ripusta sitä löysästi tai jätä kerälle.
USB-laitteen kytkeminen
Tämän vastaanottimen etulevyn USB-porttiin kytketyltä
laitteelta voi kuunnella kaksikanavaista audiota.
Kytke vastaanotin valmiustilaan ja sen jälkeen
kytke USB-laite etulevyn porttiin.
• iPodia tai iPhonea tai muita samankaltaisia laitteita
ei voi käyttää musiikkitiedostojen soittamiseen tällä
laitteella.
• Laite ei tue USB-hubeja.
• Katso ohjeet USB-laitteen käytöstä kohdasta Soitto
USB-laitteelta, sivu 20.
Connecting your equipment
2
2
14
2
35
4
Connecting antennas
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna as shown below. To
improve reception and sound quality, connect external
antennas (see Using external antennas
below).
1
Connect the DAB/FM wire antenna into the DAB/FM
antenna socket.
For best results, extend the DAB/FM wire antenna fully and
fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled
up.
Using external antennas
To improve FM reception
Use a PAL connector (not supplied) to connect an external
DAB/FM wire antenna.
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
…
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of
this receiver.
•
It is not possible to connect an iPod
®
/iPhone
®
or a similar
device to this receiver and play back music files.
•
This receiver does not support a USB hub.
•
For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a
USB device on page 20.
75 Ω coaxial cable
One-touch PAL
connector
USB mass
storage device
This receiver
Ulkoisen antennin käyttö
FM-vastaanoton parantaminen
Käytä PAL-liitintä (ei mukana) ulkoisen DAB/FM-antennin
kytkemiseen.
PAL-liitin
75 Ω koaksiaalikaapeli
USB-massamuisti
Tämä vastaanotin
15
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
Laitteiden kytkeminen
2
Virtajohdon kytkeminen
Kytke virtajohto vasta sen jälkeen kun kaikki komponentit,
myös kaiuttimet, on kytketty.
Kytke virtajohto asianmukaiseen
seinäpistorasiaan.
TÄRKEÄ
• Käsittele virtajohtoa liittimestä. Älä irrota liitintä
vetämällä johdosta äläkä kosketa johtoa märillä käsillä.
Nämä voivat aiheuttaa oikosulun tai sähköiskun. Älä
aseta laitetta tai huonekalua ym. virtajohdon päälle
äläkä purista johtoa. Älä tee johtoon solmuja tai sido
sitä muiden johtojen kanssa. Johdot tulee asentaa
siten, että niiden päälle ei astuta.Viallinen virtajohto
voi aiheuttaa tulipalon tai sähköiskun. Tarkista johdon
kunto ajoittain. Jos näet vaurioita, hanki uusi lähimmältä
Pioneerin huoltoliikkeeltä tai jälleenmyyjältä.
• Virtajohto tulee irrottaa seinäkoskettimesta, jos laite ei
ole säännöllisessä käytössä, esim. kun olet matkalla.
Huomio
• Kun vastaanotin kytketään verkkovirtaan, käynnistyy
2–10 sekuntia kestävä HDMI:n alustus. Sen aikana
ei voi tehdä muita toimenpiteitä. Prosessin aikana
etulevyn HDMI-merkkivalo vilkkuu, ja laite voidaan
kytkeä päälle vilkkumisen loputtua. Tämä prosessi
ohitetaan, jos HDMI:n asetuksissa ARC on tilassa OFF.
Katso lisää: HDMI-asetuksien valikko, sivu 33.
16
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
3
3
Perusasetukset
3
3
16
2
35
4
Basic Setup
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC)
Place the supplied setup microphone in the listening position,
measure the test tones emitted by the speakers, then the unit
automatically sets the optimum volume level for each
speaker, the crossover frequencies, and the distance from
the listening position. This also enables correction of
distortion caused by the acoustic environment of the room.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connection for
Full Auto MCACC setup.
•
The Full Auto MCACC setup will overwrite any existing
speaker settings you’ve made.
•
Before using the Full Auto MCACC setup, the USB input
should not be selected as an input source.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Connect the microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the
front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so
that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
Press
BD
button on the remote control to switch to BD/
DVD entry.
5
Press
HOME MENU
button.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu. If you cancel the Full Auto MCACC setup at
any time, the receiver automatically exits and no
settings will be made.
•
The screensaver automatically starts after three
minutes of inactivity.
6
Select “Full Auto MCACC” from the Home Menu, then
press
ENTER
.
7
Press
ENTER
again.
•
MIC IN blinks when the microphone is not connected
to
SETUP MIC
jack.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing
ENTER
.
The system outputs a series of test tones to establish the
ambient noise level.
8
Follow the instructions on-screen.
•
Make sure the microphone is connected.
•
Make sure the subwoofer is on and the volume is
turned up.
•
See below for notes regarding background noise and
other possible interference.
RECEIVER AUDIO SEL
SAT
STREAM BOX
DVD
CBLBD
S.BOX
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
TOP
MENU
VOLUME
AUX INPUT
SETUP MIC
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
3
3
16
2
35
4
Basic Setup
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC)
Place the supplied setup microphone in the listening position,
measure the test tones emitted by the speakers, then the unit
automatically sets the optimum volume level for each
speaker, the crossover frequencies, and the distance from
the listening position. This also enables correction of
distortion caused by the acoustic environment of the room.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connection for
Full Auto MCACC setup.
•
The Full Auto MCACC setup will overwrite any existing
speaker settings you’ve made.
•
Before using the Full Auto MCACC setup, the USB input
should not be selected as an input source.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Connect the microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the
front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so
that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
Press
BD
button on the remote control to switch to BD/
DVD entry.
5
Press
HOME MENU
button.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu. If you cancel the Full Auto MCACC setup at
any time, the receiver automatically exits and no
settings will be made.
•
The screensaver automatically starts after three
minutes of inactivity.
6
Select “Full Auto MCACC” from the Home Menu, then
press
ENTER
.
7
Press
ENTER
again.
•
MIC IN blinks when the microphone is not connected
to
SETUP MIC
jack.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing
ENTER
.
The system outputs a series of test tones to establish the
ambient noise level.
8
Follow the instructions on-screen.
•
Make sure the microphone is connected.
•
Make sure the subwoofer is on and the volume is
turned up.
•
See below for notes regarding background noise and
other possible interference.
RECEIVER AUDIO SEL
SAT
STREAM BOX
DVD
CBLBD
S.BOX
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
TOP
MENU
VOLUME
AUX INPUT
SETUP MIC
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
3
3
16
2
35
4
Basic Setup
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC)
Place the supplied setup microphone in the listening position,
measure the test tones emitted by the speakers, then the unit
automatically sets the optimum volume level for each
speaker, the crossover frequencies, and the distance from
the listening position. This also enables correction of
distortion caused by the acoustic environment of the room.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connection for
Full Auto MCACC setup.
•
The Full Auto MCACC setup will overwrite any existing
speaker settings you’ve made.
•
Before using the Full Auto MCACC setup, the USB input
should not be selected as an input source.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Connect the microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the
front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so
that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
Press
BD
button on the remote control to switch to BD/
DVD entry.
5
Press
HOME MENU
button.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu. If you cancel the Full Auto MCACC setup at
any time, the receiver automatically exits and no
settings will be made.
•
The screensaver automatically starts after three
minutes of inactivity.
6
Select “Full Auto MCACC” from the Home Menu, then
press
ENTER
.
7
Press
ENTER
again.
•
MIC IN blinks when the microphone is not connected
to
SETUP MIC
jack.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing
ENTER
.
The system outputs a series of test tones to establish the
ambient noise level.
8
Follow the instructions on-screen.
•
Make sure the microphone is connected.
•
Make sure the subwoofer is on and the volume is
turned up.
•
See below for notes regarding background noise and
other possible interference.
RECEIVER AUDIO SEL
SAT
STREAM BOX
DVD
CBLBD
S.BOX
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
TOP
MENU
VOLUME
AUX INPUT
SETUP MIC
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
Surroundäänen automaattiset asetukset
(MCACC)
Sijoita mukana toimitettu asennusmikrofoni kuuntelu-
kohtaan ja mittaa kaiuttimista tulevat testiäänet, minkä
jälkeen järjestelmä määrittelee kullekin kaiuttimelle
optimaalisen voimakkuuden sekä jakosuodatuksen ja
etäisyyden kuuntelukohdasta. Tämä mahdollistaa myös
huonetilan akustisten ominaisuuksien aiheuttamien
säröytymien korjaamisen.
VAROITUS
• Full Auto MCACC -asennuksen testiääni toistetaan
erittäin lujalla voimakkuudella.
Tärkeä
• TV:ssä ei näy valikkoa, jos olet kytkeytynyt siihen
komposiittilähdöstä. Full Auto MCACC -asennus vaatii
HDMI-yhteyttä.
• Full Auto MCACC-asennus korvaa kaikki aiemmin
tekemäsi kauttimien asetukset.
• Älä valitse USB:ta tulolähteeksi ennen Full Auto
MCACC -asennusta.
1 Kytke virta päälle vastaanottimeen ja televisioon.
2 Valitse TV:lle sellainen tuloliitäntä, joka vastaa
tältä vastaanottimelta HDMI-kaapelilla tulevaa
signaalia.
3 Kytke asennusmikrofoni etulevyn liitäntään
SETUP MIC.
Varmista, ettei kaiuttimien ja mikrofonin välissä ole
esteitä.
Jos sinulla on jalusta, aseta sillä mikrofoni suunnilleen
korvan tasolle normaalissa kuuntelukohdassa. Tai aseta
mikrofoni korvan tasolle pöydän tai tuolin avulla.
4 Paina kaukosäätimen näppäintä
BD
ja avaa esiin
BD/DVD-valinta.
5 Paina
HOME MENU
TV:ssä näkyy kotivalikko. Voit navigoida ruutujen
sisällä näppäimillä ja tehdä valinnan
painamalla
ENTER
. Kun painat
RETURN
, poistut
edelliseen valikkoon.
• Kotivalikosta voi poistua koska tahansa painamalla
HOME MENU
uudestaan. Jos peruutat Full Auto
MCACC -asennuksen missä tahansa vaiheessa,
valikosta poistutaan, eikä asetuksia tehdä.
• Ruudunsäästäjä käynnistyy automaattisesti jos
kolmeen minuuttiin ei tehdä mitään.
6 Valitse kotivalikosta Full Auto MCACC ja paina
ENTER
.
7 Paina uudestaan
ENTER
.
• MIC IN vilkkuu, jos mikrofonia ei ole kytkettu SETUP
MIC -liitäntään.
ENTER
in painamisen jälkeen ole mahdollisimman
hiljaa.
Järjestelmä lähettää sarjan testiääniä, joilla
määritellään ympäristön melutaso.
8 Noudata ruudussa näkyviä ohjeita
• Varmista, että mikrofoni on kytketty.
• Varmista, että alataajuuskaiutin on päällä ja sen
volyymi on auki.
• Katso jäljempää lisätietoa taustaäänistä ja muista
mahdollisista häiriöistä.
17
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
3
Perusasetukset
3
Basic Setup
3
3
17
2
35
4
9
Wait for the test tones to finish.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible
while it’s doing this.
•
For correct speaker settings, do not adjust the volume
during the test tones.
10
Confirm the speaker configuration.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
•
With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise) select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Other problems when using the Full Auto
MCACC setup below).
If the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct, use
/
to select the speaker and
/
to change the setting. When
you’re finished, go to the next step.
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side column,
there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If
selecting RETRY doesn’t fix the problem, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections.
11
Make sure “OK” is selected, then press
ENTER
.
If the screen in step 10 is left untouched for 10 seconds
and
ENTER
is not pressed in step 11, the Full Auto
MCACC setup will start automatically as shown.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 1 to 3 minutes.
12
The Full Auto MCACC setup has finished, then the Home
Menu screen is automatically displayed.
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC setup should
give you excellent surround sound from your system, but
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using
the Home Menu (starting on page 30
).
Note
•
Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes
identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can
correct the setting manually using the Speaker Setting
on
page 30.
•
The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the
actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics
into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
Other problems when using the Full Auto
MCACC setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Full Auto
MCACC setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone)
the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If
there are any instructions showing in the front panel display,
please follow them.
•
Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the
microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the
TV when doing the Full Auto MCACC setup.
1.Full Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Speaker YES/NO
Return
1.Full Auto MCACC
Check
Return
9:NEXT
Front
Center
Surround
Subwoofer
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
OK
1.Full Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Surround Analyzing
Speaker System
X.Over
Speaker Distance
Channel Level
Acoustic Cal EQ
Return
Basic Setup
3
3
17
2
35
4
9
Wait for the test tones to finish.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible
while it’s doing this.
•
For correct speaker settings, do not adjust the volume
during the test tones.
10
Confirm the speaker configuration.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
•
With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise) select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Other problems when using the Full Auto
MCACC setup below).
If the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct, use
/
to select the speaker and
/
to change the setting. When
you’re finished, go to the next step.
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side column,
there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If
selecting RETRY doesn’t fix the problem, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections.
11
Make sure “OK” is selected, then press
ENTER
.
If the screen in step 10 is left untouched for 10 seconds
and
ENTER
is not pressed in step 11, the Full Auto
MCACC setup will start automatically as shown.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 1 to 3 minutes.
12
The Full Auto MCACC setup has finished, then the Home
Menu screen is automatically displayed.
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC setup should
give you excellent surround sound from your system, but
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using
the Home Menu (starting on page 30
).
Note
•
Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes
identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can
correct the setting manually using the Speaker Setting
on
page 30.
•
The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the
actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics
into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
Other problems when using the Full Auto
MCACC setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Full Auto
MCACC setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone)
the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If
there are any instructions showing in the front panel display,
please follow them.
•
Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the
microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the
TV when doing the Full Auto MCACC setup.
1.Full Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Speaker YES/NO
Return
1.Full Auto MCACC
Check
Return
9:NEXT
Front
Center
Surround
Subwoofer
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
[ YES ]
OK
1.Full Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Surround Analyzing
Speaker System
X.Over
Speaker Distance
Channel Level
Acoustic Cal EQ
Return
9 Odota testiäänien loppumista
Näytössä näkyy tilanneraportti vastaanottimen
lähettäessä testiääntä kaiuttimien määrittelemiseksi.
Tässä vaiheessa ole mahdollisimman hiljaa.
• Älä muuta kaiuttimien volyymeja testin aikana.
10
Vahvistakaiuttimienkonguraatio
Ruudussa näkyvän konguraation tulee olla sama
kuin todellinen tilanne.
Virheilmoituksen (kuten Too much ambient noise)
jälkeen valitse RETRY (katso jäljempänä: Muita
ongelmia Full Auto MCACC -asennuksen aikana).
Jos näytössä näkyvä kaiuttimien konguraatio ei ole
oikein, valitse kaiutin näppäimillä ja muuta asetus
näppäimillä . Kun olet valmis, siirry seuraavaan
vaiheeseen.
Jos oikeanpuoleisessa sarakkeessa on virheilmoitus
ERR, kaiuttimen kytkennässä voi olla ongelma. Jos
ongelma ei korjaannu valitsemalla RETRY, sammuta virta
ja tarkista kaiuttimien kytkennät.
11
Varmista, että valitset ’OK’ ja paina
ENTER
.
Jos kohta 10 jää odottamaan 10 sekunniksi eikä
ENTER
iä paineta, Full Auto MCACC -asennus
käynnistyy automaattisesti.
Näytössä näkyy tilanneraportti vastaanottimen
lähettäessä lisää testiääniä kanavatasojen,
kaiuttimien etäisyyksien ja akustisen kalibroinnin
ekvalisaation optimiasetusten määrittämiseksi.
Tämän aikana ole mahdollisimman hiljaa. Tämä
kestää 1–3 minuttia.
12
Full Auto MCACC -asennuksen pääteeksi
kotivalikko tulee automaattisesti näyttöön.
Full Auto MCACC -asennuksen tekemien asetusten
pitäisi antaa järjestelmästäsi erinomainen
surroundääni, mutta silti voit muuttaa asetuksia
kotivalikosta (alkaen sivu 30).
Huomio
• Huonetilan ominaisuuksista johtuen, samanlaisille
12 cm kaiuttimille voi mittauksessa tulla erilaiset
kokoasetukset. Voit korjata nämä manuaalisesti
(Kaiuttimien asetukset, sivu 30).
• Alataajuuskaiuttimen asetus voi osoittaa kauemmas
kuuntelukohdasta kuin todellinen etäisyys. Tämä asetus
ottaa huomioon viiveen ja huoneen ominaisuudet, eikä
sitä yleensä tarvitse muuttaa.
Muita ongelmia Full Auto MCACC-asennuksen
aikana
Jos huoneympäristö ei ole optimaalinen Full Auto MCACC
-asennukselle (liikaa taustahäiriöitä tai esteitä kaiuttimien
ja mikrofonin välillä), mitatut asetukset eivät ehkä ole
oikein. Tarkista, vaikuttavatko kodinkoneet (ilmastointi,
jääkaappi, tuuletin ym) ympäristöön ja tarvittaessa kytke
nämä pois päältä. Jos etulevyn näyttöruudussa on
ohjeita, noudata niitä.
• Jotkut vanhat TV:t saattavat häiritä mikrofonin toimintaa.
Sellaisessa tapauksessa, sammuta TV Full Auto
MCACC -asennuksen aikana.
18
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
Perussoitto
4
4
4
18
2
35
4
Basic playback
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as
a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press
Í
RECEIVER
).
•
Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver.
For example, if you connected this receiver to the
VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO
input is now selected.
3
Press input function buttons to select the input
function you want to play.
If you selected the proper input source and there is still
no sound, select the audio input signal for playback (see
Selecting the audio input signal
below).
4
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’
and start playback of the source.
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, with a digital audio connection, you should
hear surround sound. If you’re playing a stereo source or
if the connection is an analog audio connection, you will
only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the
default listening mode.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether
or not surround sound playback is being performed
properly.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and
listening mode, check the connections and settings.
Note
•
You may need to check the digital audio output settings on
your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz/96 kHz
PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio
option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
•
Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may
only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this
case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening
mode if you want multichannel surround sound.
5
Use
VOLUME +/–
to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Selecting the audio input signal
The audio input signal can be selected for each input source.
Once it is set, the audio input that was selected will be
applied whenever you select the input source using the input
function buttons.
…
Press
AUDIO SEL
to select the audio input signal
corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the following:
•
H – Selects an HDMI signal. H can be selected for
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STRM BOX or GAME input. For
other inputs, H cannot be selected.
-
When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options
on page 27 is set to THRU, the sound will be heard
through your TV, not from this receiver.
•
A – Selects the analog inputs.
•
C1/O1 – Selects the digital input. The coaxial 1 input
is selected for C1, and the optical 1 audio input is
selected for O1.
When H (HDMI) or C1/O1 (digital) is selected and the
selected audio input is not provided, A (analog) is
automatically selected.
Note
•
STRM BOX and GAME inputs are fixed to H (HDMI). It
cannot be changed.
•
For the TV input, only A (analog) or C1/O1 (digital) can be
selected. However, if the ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON,
the input is fixed to H (HDMI) and cannot be changed.
•
When set to H (HDMI) or C1/O1 (digital), lights when a
Dolby Digital signal is input, and DTS lights when a DTS
signal is input.
•
When the H (HDMI) is selected, the A and DIGITAL
indicators are off (see page 5
).
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
SATSAT
STREAM BOXSTREAM BOX
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
DVDDVD
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURN
TOP
MENU
VOLUMEVOLUME
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
SATSAT
STREAM BOXSTREAM BOX
DVDDVD
4
4
18
2
35
4
Basic playback
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as
a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press
Í
RECEIVER
).
•
Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver.
For example, if you connected this receiver to the
VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO
input is now selected.
3
Press input function buttons to select the input
function you want to play.
If you selected the proper input source and there is still
no sound, select the audio input signal for playback (see
Selecting the audio input signal
below).
4
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’
and start playback of the source.
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, with a digital audio connection, you should
hear surround sound. If you’re playing a stereo source or
if the connection is an analog audio connection, you will
only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the
default listening mode.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether
or not surround sound playback is being performed
properly.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and
listening mode, check the connections and settings.
Note
•
You may need to check the digital audio output settings on
your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz/96 kHz
PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio
option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
•
Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may
only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this
case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening
mode if you want multichannel surround sound.
5
Use
VOLUME +/–
to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Selecting the audio input signal
The audio input signal can be selected for each input source.
Once it is set, the audio input that was selected will be
applied whenever you select the input source using the input
function buttons.
…
Press
AUDIO SEL
to select the audio input signal
corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the following:
•
H – Selects an HDMI signal. H can be selected for
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STRM BOX or GAME input. For
other inputs, H cannot be selected.
-
When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options
on page 27 is set to THRU, the sound will be heard
through your TV, not from this receiver.
•
A – Selects the analog inputs.
•
C1/O1 – Selects the digital input. The coaxial 1 input
is selected for C1, and the optical 1 audio input is
selected for O1.
When H (HDMI) or C1/O1 (digital) is selected and the
selected audio input is not provided, A (analog) is
automatically selected.
Note
•
STRM BOX and GAME inputs are fixed to H (HDMI). It
cannot be changed.
•
For the TV input, only A (analog) or C1/O1 (digital) can be
selected. However, if the ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON,
the input is fixed to H (HDMI) and cannot be changed.
•
When set to H (HDMI) or C1/O1 (digital), lights when a
Dolby Digital signal is input, and DTS lights when a DTS
signal is input.
•
When the H (HDMI) is selected, the A and DIGITAL
indicators are off (see page 5
).
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
SATSAT
STREAM BOXSTREAM BOX
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
DVDDVD
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
USB
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURN
TOP
MENU
VOLUMEVOLUME
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
SATSAT
STREAM BOXSTREAM BOX
DVDDVD
Soitto äänilähteestä
Tässä ovat perusohjeet äänilähteestä (kuten DVD-levy)
soittamiseen kotiteatterijärjestelmälläsi.
1 Kytke päälle järjestelmän komponentit ja
vastaanotin.
Kytke virta ensin komponentteihin (esim. DVD-soitin),
televisioon ja alataajuuskaiuttimeen (jos käytössä),
sitten vastaanottimeen painamalla
RECEIVER
.
• Varmista, ettei asennusmikrofoni ole kytkettynä.
2 Valitse TV:n tuloliitännäksi tästä vastaanottimesta
tuleva yhteys.
Esimerkki: jos olet kytkenyt vastaanottimen TV:n
VIDEO-liitäntöihin, valitse tuloliitännäksi VIDEO.
3 Valitse tuloliitännän toimintonäppäimiä painamalla
se toiminto, jota haluat käyttää.
Jos tuloliitäntä on valittu oikein, mutta ääntä ei kuulu,
valitse soiton äänelle tulosignaali (katso jäljempänä
Audion tulosignaalin valitseminen).
4 Paina
AUTO/DIRECT
, joka valitsee AUTO
SURROUND sekä käynnistä soitto äänilähteestä.
Jos soitettavana on DVD-levy varustettuna Dolby
Digital- tai DTS-surroundäänellä, surroundäänen
pitäisi nyt kuulua. Jos äänilähde on stereo tai käytät
analogista äänikytkentää, ääni kuuluu oletustilassa
vain edestä vasemmasta ja oikeasta kaiuttimesta.
Etulevyn näyttöruudusta voit tarkistaa, toimiiko
surroundäänen toisto oikein.
Jos näytön tieto ei vastaa tulosignaalia tai
kuuntelutilaa, tarkista kytkennät ja asetukset.
Huomio
• Voi olla tarpeen tarkistaa DVD-soittimen tai digitaalisen
satelliittivastaanottimen digitaalisen audiolähdön
asetukset. Lähtönä pitäisi olla Dolby Digital, DTS
ja 88.2kHz/96 kHz PCM (2 kanavaa) -audio, ja
jos valittavissa on MPEG audio, se tulee asettaa
muuntamaan MPEG-audio PCM:ksi.
• DVD-soittimesta tai soitettavasta levystä riippuen
voidaan saada vain digitaalinen kaksikanavainen
stereo ja analoginen ääni. Tällaisessa tapauksessa
vastaanotin tulee asettaa monikanavaiseen
kuuntelutilaan, mikäli monikanavainen surroundääni
halutaan.
5 Säädä äänenvoimakkuus näppäimillä
VOLUME +/-
.
Säädä TV:n ääni hiljaiseksi, jotta kaikki ääni kuuluu
vastaanottimeen kytketyistä kaiuttimista.
Audion tulosignaalin valitseminen
Jokaiselle lähdetulolle voidaan valita audion tulosignaali.
Kun asetus on tehty, valittua audiotuloa sovelletaan aina
kun valitset saman lähdetulon.
Paina
AUDIO SEL
lähdekomponenttia vastaavan
audion tulosignaalin valitsemiseksi.
Painallukset kiertävät seuraavassa järjestyksessä:
• H – Valitseee HDMI-signaalin. H voidaan valita
tuloille BD/DVD, STRM BOX ja GAME. Muille
tuloille H ei ole valittavissa.
- Kun HDMI:n optio kohdassa Audioasetukset
(sivu 27) on tilassa THRU, ääni kuuluu TV:stä, ei
vastaanottimen kautta.
• A – valitsee analogiset tulot.
• C1/O1 – valitsee digitaalisen tulon. C1 valitsee
koaksiaalisen tulon 1, O1 optisen audiotulon 1.
Kun valittuna on H (HDMI) tai C1/O1 (digitaalinen),
eikä valittua audiotuloa ole, valinta muuttuu
automaattisesti A:ksi (analoginen).
Huomio
• STRM BOXin ja GAMEn tuloliitäntä on kiinteästi H
(HDMI). Tätä ei voi vaihtaa.
• TV:n tuloliitännäksi voidaan valita vain A (analoginen)
ai C1/O1 (digitaalinen). Mutta jos HDMI-asetusten ARC
on tilassa ON, tuloliitäntä on kiinteästi H (HDMI) eikä
sitä voi vaihtaa.
• Kun valittuna on H (HDMI) tai C1/O1 (digitaalinen),
merkkivalo syttyy, kun tulosignaali on Dolby Digital ja
DTS syttyy, kun tulosignaali on DTS.
• Kun valittuna on H (HDMI), merkkivalot A ja DIGITAL
ovat pois päältä (sivu 5).
19
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
Perussoitto
4
Basic playback
4
4
19
2
35
4
•
When digital input (optical or coaxial) is selected, this
receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to
96 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) digital
signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI
terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, SACD (DSD 2 ch only),
PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz sampling frequencies), Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD
Master Audio and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With
other digital signal formats, set to A (analog).
•
You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player
compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To
prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 11
) and set the signal input to C1/O1 (digital).
•
Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your
DVD player.
a. The HDMI terminals can be used for the TV input by
turning ON the ARC function in the HDMI setting
(page 33
).
b. In order to listen to the audio from the TV that is
connected to this receiver using a analog audio cables,
set-up for analog audio input is required (see The Input
Assign menu on page 32).
Input
function
Input Terminals
HDMI COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG
BD/DVD

TV
a

b
CBL/SAT

CD

STRM
BOX

GAME

AUX

Tip
•
In order to enjoy the picture and/or sound from devices connected to each terminal, select the input by doing the following.
C1
1.
O1
2.
A
A
1.
2.
CBL
BD
CBL
BD
S.BOX
GAME
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
CBLBD
TV
TV
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
CD
AUDIO SELAUDIO SELAUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
BD
CD
TV
TUN
TUNER
CBL
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Video/Audio (HDMI)
Video
Other than TV input
(TV input)
(CD) audio input terminal is
assigned to CD under factory
settings. If you want to
change this to TV input,
please change the settings in
the Input Assign menu
(page 32
).
Basic playback
4
4
19
2
35
4
•
When digital input (optical or coaxial) is selected, this
receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to
96 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) digital
signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI
terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, SACD (DSD 2 ch only),
PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz sampling frequencies), Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD
Master Audio and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With
other digital signal formats, set to A (analog).
•
You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player
compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To
prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 11
) and set the signal input to C1/O1 (digital).
•
Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your
DVD player.
a. The HDMI terminals can be used for the TV input by
turning ON the ARC function in the HDMI setting
(page 33
).
b. In order to listen to the audio from the TV that is
connected to this receiver using a analog audio cables,
set-up for analog audio input is required (see The Input
Assign menu on page 32).
Input
function
Input Terminals
HDMI COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG
BD/DVD

TV
a

b
CBL/SAT

CD

STRM
BOX

GAME

AUX

Tip
•
In order to enjoy the picture and/or sound from devices connected to each terminal, select the input by doing the following.
C1
1.
O1
2.
A
A
1.
2.
CBL
BD
CBL
BD
S.BOX
GAME
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
CBLBD
TV
TV
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
CD
AUDIO SELAUDIO SELAUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
BD
CD
TV
TUN
TUNER
CBL
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Video/Audio (HDMI)
Video
Other than TV input
(TV input)
(CD) audio input terminal is
assigned to CD under factory
settings. If you want to
change this to TV input,
please change the settings in
the Input Assign menu
(page 32
).
• Kun valittuna on digitaalinen tulo (optinen tai
koaksiaalinen), vastaanotin voi soittaa digitaalisia
signaaliformaatteja Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz–96kHz)
ja DTS (sisältäen DTS 96 kHz/24 bit). HDMI-liitännän
kautta yhteensopivia signaaleja ovat: Dolby Digital,
DTS, SACD (DSD 2 kanavaa), PCM (32 kHz–192 kHz
näytetaajuus), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio ja DVD
Audio (sisältäen 192kHz). Valitse muille digitaalisille
formaateille A (analoginen).
• Digitaalista kohinaa voi kuulua, kun DTS-yhteensopiva
LD- tai DVD-soitin toistaa analogista signaalia. Kohinaa
voi estää valitsemalla oikeanlainen digitaalinen
liitäntä (sivu 11) ja valitsemalla signaalituloksi C1/O1
(digitaalinen).
• Jotkut DVD-soittimet eivät soita DTS-signaaleja. Katso
lisätietoa DVD-soittimesi ohjekirjasta.
Tulo-
toiminto
a HDMI-liitäntää voidaan käyttää tulolle TV:sta, kun
HDMI-asetusten ARC-toiminto on tilassa ON (sivu 33)
b Voit kuunnella analogisella audiojohdolla kytketyn
TV:n ääntä vastaanottimella kun teet asetukset
analogisen audion tuloliitännälle (katso Tuloliitännän
määrittely, sivu 32).
HDMI Koaksiaalinen Optinen Analoginen
Tuloliitäntä
Vihje
• Saat kuvaa ja/tai ääntä kaikkiin liitäntöihin kytketyistä laitteista valitsemalla tulot seuraavasti.
(CD) tehdasasetuksissa
audion tuloliitäntä on
määritetty CD:lle. Jos
haluat vaihtaa tämän
TV:lle, tee muutokset
tuloliitännän määrittelyn
valikkoon (sivu 32).
Muun kuin TV:n tulo
TV:n tulo
20
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
Perussoitto
4
Basic playback
4
4
20
2
35
4
Playing a USB device
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
Important
•
Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or
bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may
occur when connected to this receiver.
Note
•
This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files
(except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).
•
Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard
drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and
digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It
is not possible to connect this receiver to a computer for
USB playback.
•
With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the
receiver to read the contents of a USB device.
•
If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver
automatically skips to the next file playable.
•
When the file currently being played back has no title
assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD
instead; when neither the album name nor the artist name
is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
•
Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are
displayed as ‘*’.
•
Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting
the USB device.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting a USB device on page 14.
2
Switch the TV input so that it connects to the receiver.
•
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Press
USB
on the remote control to switch the receiver
to the USB input.
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. After the
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and
playback starts automatically.
Basic playback controls
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic
playback of files stored on USB devices.
•
Press
USB
to switch the remote control to the USB
operation mode.
Important
If a USB Error message lights in the display, try following the
points below:
•
Switch the receiver off, then on again.
•
Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.
•
Select another input source (like BD/DVD), then switch
back to USB.
•
Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for
USB power.
For more information on error messages, see USB
messages on page 36.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Compressed audio compatibility
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate
combinations for compressed audio are compatible, some
irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list below
shows compatible formats for compressed audio files:
•
MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz; Bit rates: 32 kbps to 320 kbps
(128 kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3
•
WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates: 32 kHz/
44.1 kHz/48 kHz; Bit rates: 48 kbps to 192 kbps (128 kbps
or higher recommended); File extension: .wma; WMA9
Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No
•
AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling
rates: 32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to
320 kbps (128 kbps or higher recommended); File
extension: .m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No
Other compatibility information
•
VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback:
Yes (Note that in some cases playback time will not be
displayed correctly.)
•
Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this
receiver.
•
DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this
receiver.
About MPEG-4 AAC
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the MPEG-4
AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming
the basis of the MPEG-4 audio compression technology. The
file format and extension used depend on the application
used to encode the AAC file. This receiver plays back AAC
files encoded by iTunes
®
bearing the extension ‘.m4a’.
DRM-protected files will not play, and files encoded with
some versions of iTunes
®
may not play.
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
About WMA
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to
an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. This receiver plays back WMA files encoded
using Windows Media
®
Player bearing the extension ‘.wma’.
Note that DRM-protected files will not play, and files encoded
with some versions of Windows Media
®
Player may not play.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
BASS
VOLUMEVOLUME
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
USB
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
BAND
HOME
MENU
RETURN
TOP
MENU
USB-laitteelta soittaminen
Tällä vastaanottimella voi kuunnella kaksikanavaista
audiota etulevyn USB-portin kautta.
Tärkeä
• Pioneer ei takaa yhteensopivuutta (toimivuus ja
virransyöttö) kaikkien USB-massamuistien kanssa
eikä vastaa datan häviämisistä kytkeydyttäessä tähän
vastaanottimeen.
Huomio
• Tähän sisältyy WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC-tiedostojen
soitto (paitsi tiedostot, joilla on kopiosuojaus tai
rajoitettu soitto).
• Yhteensopiviin USB-laitteisiin kuuluvat kannettavat
ulkoiset magneettiset kiintolevyt, muistitikut sekä
digitaaliset audiosoittimet (MP3-soittimet) formaatissa
FAT16/32. Vastaanotinta ei voi kytkeä tietokoneeseen
soittoa varten.
• USB-laitteen sisällön lukemiseen voi kulua jonkin aikaa,
jos sillä on runsaasti dataa.
• Jos valittua tiedostoa ei voi soittaa, vastaanotin siirtyy
automaattisesti seuraavaan soitettavissa olevaan
tiedostoon.
• Jos soitettavalle tiedostolle ei ole tallennettu kappaleen
nimeä, näytössä näkyy sen sijaan tiedoston nimi; jos artis-
tin tai albumin nimeä ei ole tallennettu, rivinäyttö on tyhjä.
• Huomaa, että soittolistassa ei-roomalaiset kirjaimet
ilmaistaan ”
*
”.
• Varmista, että vastaanotin on valmiustilassa kun kytket
USB-laitteen.
1 Kytke virta vastaanottimeen ja televisioon
Katso USB-laitteen kytkeminen, sivu 14.
2 Valitse TV:n tuloliitännäksi kytkeytyminen
vastaanottimeen.
• Valitse sama tuloliitäntä, johon vastaanotin on
kytketty HDMI-kaapelilla.
3 Paina kaukosäätimen
USB
ja valitse
vastaanottimelle tuloksi USB.
Näyttövalikossa näkyy Loading, kun vastaanotin
tunnistaa kytkettyä USB-laitetta. Tunnistamisen jälkeen
näytössä on soittoruutu ja soitto alkaa automaattisesti.
Soiton perusohjaus
Vastaanottimen kaukosäätimen näppäimiä voidaan
käyttää USB-laitteelta soittamisen perusohjaukseen.
• Paina
USB
ja vaihda kaukosäädin USB-käytön tilaan.
Tärkeä
Jos näyttöruudussa syttyy merkkivalo USB Error, kokeile
seuraavia:
• Sammuta vastaanotin ja kytke virta taas päälle.
• Kytke USB-laite uudelleen, kun vastaanottimen virta on
sammutettuna.
• Valitse hetkeksi toinen tuloliitäntä (esim. BD/DVD) ja
vaihda takaisin USB.
• Käytä USB-virralle sen omaa verkkovirtasovitinta.
Lisää tietoa virheilmoituksista, katso USB-viesti (sivu 36).
Jos ongelma ei ratkea näillä, USB-laitteesi on
luultavimmin yhteensopimaton.
Kompressoidun audion yhteensopivuus
Huomioi, että useimmat bittisyydet ja näytetaajuudet
ovat yhteensopivia, mutta silti joitakin poikkeavilla tavoilla
koodattuja tiedostoja ei voi soittaa. Seuraava listaus
luettelee yhteensopivat kompressoidut audioformaatit:
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3)
– Näytetaajuudet: 32 kHz / 44,1 kHz / 48 kHz;
Bittinopeudet: 32 kbps–320 kbps (suositellaan 128 kbps
tai enemmän); Tiedostopääte: .mp3
• WMA (Windows Media Audio)
– Näytetaajuudet: 32 kHz / 44,1 kHz / 48 kHz;
Bittinopeudet: 48 kbps–192 kbps (suositellaan 128 kbps
tai enemmän); Tiedostopääte: .wma; WMA9 Pro ja
WMA häviötön koodaus: Ei
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding)
– Näytetaajuudet: 32 kHz / 44,1 kHz / 48 kHz;
Bittinopeudet: 16 kbps–320 kbps (suositellaan 128 kbps
tai enemmän); Tiedostopääte: .m4a; Apple lossless
encoding: Ei.
Muuta tietoa yhteensopivuudesta
• VBR (Variable Bit Rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC
-soitto: Kyllä (joissakin tapauksissa soiton kesto ei näy
näytössä oikein).
• Tekijänoikeudella suojattuja audiotiedostoja ei voi
soittaa tällä vastaanottimella,
• DRM-suojattuja audiotiedostoja ei voi soittaa tällä
vastaanottimella.
Tietoa MPEG-4 AAC:sta
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) on ytimenä MPEG-4
AAC -standardissa, joka sisältää MPEG-2 AAC:n ja
on perustana MPEG-4-audiokompressioteknologialle.
Tiedoston formaatti ja pääte riippuvat AAC-tiedoston
koodaukseen käytetystä sovelluksesta. Vastaanotin
soittaa iTunesin koodaamia AAC-tiedostoja, joilla pääte
on ’.m4a’.
DRM-suojattuja tiedostoja ei voi soittaa, eikä myöskään
joillakin iTunesin versioilla koodattuja tiedostoja.
Apple ja iTunes ovat Apple Inc.’in tuotemerkkejä ja ne on
rekisteröity Yhdysvalloissa ja muissa maissa.
WMA:sta
WMA on lyhenne sanoista Windows Media Audio
ja se viittää Microsoft Corporationin kehittämään
audiokompressioteknologiaan. Tämä vastaanotin soittaa
Windows Media Playerilla koodattuja WMA-tiedostoja,
joiden pääte on ’.wma’.
DRM-suojattuja tiedostoja ei voi soittaa, eikä aina
myöskään joillakin Windows Media Playerin versioilla
koodattuja tiedostoja.
21
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
4
Perussoitto
Basic playback
4
4
21
2
35
4
Music playback using BLUETOOTH
®
wireless technology
You can wirelessly enjoy music files stored in a smartphone
or other BLUETOOTH capable device. The coverage area is
about 10 meters.
Note
•
The BLUETOOTH
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
•
The BLUETOOTH wireless technology enabled device
must support A2DP profiles.
•
We do not guarantee proper connection and operation of
this unit with all BLUETOOTH wireless technology
enabled devices.
Pairing with the unit (Initial registration)
Pairing should be performed when first using the unit with the
BLUETOOTH capable device, or when the pairing data on
the device has been erased for any reason.
•
After pressing the
BT
and switching to BT Audio function,
perform the pairing procedure on the BLUETOOTH
capable device. If pairing has been performed correctly,
you will not need to perform the pairing procedures for the
unit as shown below.
1
Press the
BT
.
2
Turn on the power to the BLUETOOTH capable device
that you wish to pair with, and perform pairing
procedure on it.
•
This unit will be displayed as “Pioneer VSX-531D” on
all BLUETOOTH capable devices that you have.
Pairing will start.
•
Place the BLUETOOTH capable device close to the
unit.
•
Please refer to the user’s manual for your
BLUETOOTH capable device for details on when
pairing can be performed and the procedures
required for pairing.
•
When PIN code entry is requested, enter “0000”. (This
unit does not accept any PIN code setting other than
“0000”.)
3
Confirm on the BLUETOOTH capable device that
pairing has been completed.
If pairing with the BLUETOOTH capable device has
been completed correctly “CONNECT” will be displayed.
Listen to music on the unit from a BLUETOOTH
capable device
1
Press the
BT
.
The unit will switch to BT Audio input.
2
A BLUETOOTH connection will be created between the
BLUETOOTH capable device and the unit.
Procedures for connecting to the unit should be
performed from the BLUETOOTH capable device.
•
Please refer to the user’s manual for your
BLUETOOTH capable device for details of the
connection procedures.
3
Playback music from the BLUETOOTH capable device.
Radio wave caution
This unit uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave frequency, which is a
band used by other wireless systems (see list below). To
prevent noise or interrupted communication, do not use this
unit nearby such devices, or make sure these devices are
switched off during use.
•
Cordless phones
•
Cordless facsimiles
•
Microwave ovens
•
Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g)
•
Wireless AV equipment
•
Wireless controllers for game systems
•
Microwave-based health aids
•
Some baby monitors
Other, less common, equipment that may operate on the
same frequency:
•
Anti-theft systems
•
Amateur radio stations (HAM)
•
Warehouse logistic management systems
•
Discrimination systems for train or emergency vehicles
Note
•
In the event noise appears in your television image, there
is the possibility that a BLUETOOTH wireless technology
enabled device or this unit (including products supported
by this unit) are causing signal interference with the
antenna input connector of your television, video, satellite
tuner, etc. In this event, increase the distance between the
antenna input connector and the BLUETOOTH wireless
technology enabled device or this unit (including products
supported by this unit).
•
If there is something obstructing the path between this unit
(including devices supported by this unit) and the device
equipped with BLUETOOTH wireless technology (such as
a metal door, concrete wall, or insulation containing tinfoil),
you may need to change the location of your system to
prevent signal noise and interruptions.
Scope of operation
Use of this unit is limited to home use. (Transmission
distances may be reduced depending on communication
environment.)
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
Musiikin soitto käyttäen langatonta
BLUETOOTH-teknologiaa
Voi kuunnella langattomasti älypuhelimelle tai muulle
BLUETOOTH-laitteelle tallennettuja musiikkitiedostoja.
Kantama on noin 10 metriä.
Huomio
• BLUETOOTH-sanamerkki ja logot ovat Bluetooth SIG
Inc.’in rekisteröityjä tuotemerkkejä.
• Langattoman BLUETOOTH-laitteen on tuettava A2DP-
proileja.
• Emme takaa kaikkien langattomien BLUETOOTH-
laitteiden kytkeytyvän ja toimivan täysin tämän
vastaanottimen kanssa.
Laitepari (Alkurekisteröinti)
Laitepari tulee muodostaa käytettäessä BLUETOOTH-
laitetta vastaanottimen kansa ensi kertaa, tai jos aiemmat
paritiedot on jostain syystä poistettu.
• Paina
BT
ja siirry BT Audio -toimintoon. Muodosta
laitepari BLUETOOTH-laittteen kanssa. Jos pari on
muodostettu oikein, alla kuvattua toimenpidettä ei enää
tarvita.
1 Paina
BT
.
2 Kytke virta siihen BLUETOOTH-laitteeseen, jonka
kanssa haluat muodostaa parin ja muodosta pari
kyseisen laitteen asetuksilla.
• Bluetooth-laitteessa vastaanottimen nimenä on
”Pioneer VSX-531D”.
Pari muodostetaan.
• Asete BLUETOOTH-laite lähelle vastaanotinta.
• Katso BLUETOOTH-laitteen ohjeista parin
muodostamisen yksityiskohdat ja tarpeelliset
toimenpiteet.
• Jos tarvitaan PIN-koodin syöttö, syötä ”0000”.
(Tälle laitteelle ei voi antaa muuta PIN-koodia kuin
”0000”).
3 Varmista BLUETOOTH-laitteelta, että pari on
muodostettu.
Jos parin muodostaminen on onnistunut täysin,
näytössä on ”CONNECT”.
Kuuntele musiikkia BLUETOOTH-laitteelta
1 Paina BT.
Vastaanottimen tuloliitännäksi valitaan BT Audio.
2 BLUETOOTH-yhteys luodaan BLUETOOTH-
laitteen ja vastaanottimen välille.
Kytkeytyminen vastaanottimeen tehdään
BLUETOOTH-laitteelta käsin.
• Katso yksityiskohdat kytkeytymisestä BLUETOOTH-
laitteen ohjeista.
3 Soita musiikkia BLUETOOTH-laitteelta
Tärkeää radioaalloista
Tämä laite käyttää radioaaltotaajuutta 2,4 GHz ja samaa
kaistaa käyttävät monet muutkin langattomat järjestelmät
(katso lista alla). Estä kohinaa ja katkoksia yhteydessä,
äläkä käytä vastaanotinta näiden läheisyydessä tai
sammuta nämä laitteet:
• Langattomat puhelimet
• Langattomat faksit
• Mikroaaltouunit
• Langattomat verkkolaitteet (IEEE802.11b/g)
• Langattomat AV-laitteet
• Pelikonsoleiden langattomat ohjaimet
• Mikroaaltoja käyttävät terveystuotteet
• Jotkut itkuhälyttimet
Samalla taajuudella saattavat toimia harvinaisemmat
laitteet:
• Varkaudenestojärjestelmät
• Amatööriradioasemat (HAM)
• Varastojen logistiikkajärjestelmät
• Junien tai hälytysajoneuvojen varoitusjärjestelmät
Huomio
• Mikäli television kuvassa näkyy häiriötä, mahdollisesti
langaton BLUETOOTH-laite tai tämä vastaanotin (tai
jokin siihen kytketty laite) aiheuttaa häiriösignaalin TV:n,
videon tai satelliittivirittimen antennin tuloliitännälle.
Tällaisessa tapauksessa vie BLUETOOTH-laite
kauemmas antenniliittimestä tai vastaanottimesta (sekä
kytketyistä laitteista).
• Jos vastaanottimen ja BLUETOOTH-laitteen välisen
suoran yhteyden sisällä on este (kuten metalliovi,
betoniseinä tai folioeriste), sinun on ehkä siirrettävä
järjestelmä toiseen paikkaan kohinan ja katkoksien
estämiseksi.
Käyttötarkoitus
Tämä laite on tarkoitettu kotikäyttöön. Ympäristöstä
riippuen viestinnän toimiva yhteys voi olla lyhyempi.
22
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
4
Perussoitto
Basic playback
4
4
22
2
35
4
In the following locations, poor condition or inability to receive
radio waves may cause the audio to be interrupted or
stopped:
•
In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or iron-
framed buildings.
•
Near large metallic furniture.
•
In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
•
In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static electricity
or radio wave interference from radio communication
equipment using the same frequency band (2.4 GHz) as
this unit, such as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
(IEEE802.11b/g) or microwave oven.
•
If you live in a heavily populated residential area
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s
microwave is placed near your system, you may
experience radio wave interference. If this occurs, move
your unit to a different place. When the microwave is not
in use, there will be no radio wave interference.
Radio wave reflections
The radio waves received by this unit include the radio wave
coming directly from the device equipped with BLUETOOTH
wireless technology (direct wave) and waves coming from
various directions due to reflections by walls, furniture and
building (reflected waves). The reflected waves (due to
obstacles and reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception condition
depending on locations. If the audio cannot be received
properly due to this phenomenon, try moving the location of
the device equipped with BLUETOOTH wireless technology
a little. Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
reflected waves when a person crosses or approaches the
space between this unit and the device equipped with
BLUETOOTH wireless technology.
Precautions regarding connections to products
supported by this unit
•
Complete connections for all devices supported by this
unit, including all audio cords and power cables before
connecting them to this unit.
•
After completing connections to this unit, check the audio
and power cables to confirm that they not twisted together.
•
When disconnecting this unit, confirm that you have
sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
When changing connections of audio or other cables for
products supported by this unit, confirm that you have
sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
Listening to FM Radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM radio
broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step)
tuning functions. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving station
presets below for more on how to do this.
1
Press
TUN
then press
BAND
to select the FM band.
2
Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations, press and hold
TUNE +/–
for
about a second. The receiver will start searching for the
next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to
search for other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE +/–
.
High speed tuning
Press and hold
TUNE +/–
for high speed tuning.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNE or ST indicators don’t light when tuning to an FM
station because the signal is weak, set the receiver to the
mono reception mode.
…
Press
BAND
to select FM MONO.
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient
to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall
whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the
effort of manually tuning in each time. This unit can
memorize up to 30 stations.
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to FM Radio above for more on this.
2
Press
EDIT
.
The display shows PRESET, then a blinking MEM and
station preset.
3
Press
PRESET +/–
to select the station preset you
want.
4
Press
ENTER
.
The preset number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the station.
Note
•
If the receiver is left disconnected from the AC power
outlet for over a month, the station memories will be lost
and will have to be reprogrammed.
•
Stations are stored in stereo. When the station is stored in
the FM MONO mode, it shows as ST when recalled.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets
on page 22 if you haven’t done this
already.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S
.
BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
BAND
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
PRESET
+
BAND
Basic playback
4
4
22
2
35
4
In the following locations, poor condition or inability to receive
radio waves may cause the audio to be interrupted or
stopped:
•
In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or iron-
framed buildings.
•
Near large metallic furniture.
•
In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
•
In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static electricity
or radio wave interference from radio communication
equipment using the same frequency band (2.4 GHz) as
this unit, such as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
(IEEE802.11b/g) or microwave oven.
•
If you live in a heavily populated residential area
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s
microwave is placed near your system, you may
experience radio wave interference. If this occurs, move
your unit to a different place. When the microwave is not
in use, there will be no radio wave interference.
Radio wave reflections
The radio waves received by this unit include the radio wave
coming directly from the device equipped with BLUETOOTH
wireless technology (direct wave) and waves coming from
various directions due to reflections by walls, furniture and
building (reflected waves). The reflected waves (due to
obstacles and reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception condition
depending on locations. If the audio cannot be received
properly due to this phenomenon, try moving the location of
the device equipped with BLUETOOTH wireless technology
a little. Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
reflected waves when a person crosses or approaches the
space between this unit and the device equipped with
BLUETOOTH wireless technology.
Precautions regarding connections to products
supported by this unit
•
Complete connections for all devices supported by this
unit, including all audio cords and power cables before
connecting them to this unit.
•
After completing connections to this unit, check the audio
and power cables to confirm that they not twisted together.
•
When disconnecting this unit, confirm that you have
sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
When changing connections of audio or other cables for
products supported by this unit, confirm that you have
sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
Listening to FM Radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM radio
broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step)
tuning functions. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving station
presets below for more on how to do this.
1
Press
TUN
then press
BAND
to select the FM band.
2
Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations, press and hold
TUNE +/–
for
about a second. The receiver will start searching for the
next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to
search for other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE +/–
.
High speed tuning
Press and hold
TUNE +/–
for high speed tuning.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNE or ST indicators don’t light when tuning to an FM
station because the signal is weak, set the receiver to the
mono reception mode.
…
Press
BAND
to select FM MONO.
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient
to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall
whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the
effort of manually tuning in each time. This unit can
memorize up to 30 stations.
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to FM Radio above for more on this.
2
Press
EDIT
.
The display shows PRESET, then a blinking MEM and
station preset.
3
Press
PRESET +/–
to select the station preset you
want.
4
Press
ENTER
.
The preset number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the station.
Note
•
If the receiver is left disconnected from the AC power
outlet for over a month, the station memories will be lost
and will have to be reprogrammed.
•
Stations are stored in stereo. When the station is stored in
the FM MONO mode, it shows as ST when recalled.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets
on page 22 if you haven’t done this
already.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S
.
BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
BAND
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S.BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
PRESET
+
BAND
Seuraavissa sijainneissa olosuhteet tai radioaaltojen
estynyt vastaanotto voivat aiheuttaa audioon katkoksia tai
pysähdyksen:
• Lujabetonirakennuksissa tai rauta/teräsrunkoisissa
rakennuksissa.
• Lähellä isoja metallisia huonekaluja.
• Ihmisjoukossa tai lähellä rakennusta tai estettä.
• Magneettikentän, staattista sähköä tai
radioviestintälaiteiden aiheuttamaa radioaaltohäiriötä
sisältävässä paikassa, jossa on samaa 2.4 GHz
taajuuskaistaa käyttäviä laitteita, kuten langaton
lähiverkko (IEEE802.11b/g) tai mikroaaltouuni.
• Tiheästi asutulla alueella naapurinkin mikroaaltouuni voi
läheltä aiheuttaa radioaaltohäiriötä. Silloin siirrä laitteet
toiseen paikkaan. Häiriötä ei tule kun mikroaaltouuni ei
ole käytössä.
Radioaaltojen heijastumat
Tämä laite vastaanottaa radioaaltoja sekä suoraan
BLUETOOTH-laitteelta, että heijastumina eri suunnista,
kuten seinistä, huonekaluista tai rakennuksista. Aaltojen
heijastuminen esteiden takia tai muista syistä aiheuttavat
lisää heijastumia sekä paikasta riippuvan vaihtelun
vastaanoton olosuhteisiin. Jos näistä syistä audiota ei
voida vastaanottaa kunnolla, kokeile siirtää BLUETOOTH-
laitetta hiukan. Huomaa myös, että audiossa voi
aiheutua katkos, jos henkilö kulkee vastaanottimen ja
BLUETOOTH-laitteen välistä tai lähestyy niitä.
Tärkeitä seikkoja laitteiden kytkemisestä
tähän vastaanottimeen
• Tee kaikki kytkennät audiojohdoilla ja virtajohdoilla
vastaanottimen tukemiin laitteisiin ennen kuin kytket
ne kiinni.
• Kun kytkennät vastaanottimeen ovat valmiit, tarkista,
etteivät kaapelit ja johdot ole kiertyneet keskenään.
• Kun irrotat kytkentöjä, varaa riittävästi tilaa ympärillesi.
Kun teet muutoksia audiojohtoihin tai muihin kytkentöihin,
varaa riittävästi tilaa ympärillesi.
FM-radion kuuntelu
Seuraavilla toimenpiteillä voit virittää FM-radion
automaattisesti (haku) tai manuaalisesti (portaittain).
Kanavan virittämisen jälkeen voit tallentaa sen taajuuden
haettavaksi myöhemmin. Katso lisää jäljempänä:
Kanavien tallentaminen.
1 Paina
TUN
ja sen jälkeen
BAND
ja valitse
FM-kaista.
2 Viritä asema.
Tämän voi tehdä kolmella tavalla:
❖ Automaattinen viritys
Paina ja pidä
TUNE +/-
noin sekunnin ajan, mikä
käynnistää kanavan hakemisen, kunnes kanava
löytyy. Toista tämä uusien kanavien hakemiseksi.
❖ Manuaalinen viritys
Vaihda taajuutta askel kerrallaan painamalla
TUNE +/-
.
❖ Pikaviritys
Pidä
TUNE +/-
painettuna pikavirityksessä.
FM-äänen parantaminen
Jos merkkivalot TUNE tai ST eivät heikossa signaalissa
syty, vaikka kanava on viritetty, aseta vastaanotin
monovastaanottoon.
Paina BAND ja valitse FM MONO.
Tämän pitäisi parantaa vastaanottoa ja pääset
kuuntelemaan lähetystä.
Kanavien tallentaminen
Jos kuuntelet usein jotain radiokanavaa, on kätevää
tallentaa sen taajuus myöhempää käyttöä varten. Säästyt
manuaalisen virittämisen vaivalta. Vastaanottimeen voi
tallentaa jopa 30 kanavaa.
1 Viritä kanavalle, jonka haluat tallentaa
Katso ylempää: FM-radion kuuntelu.
2 Paina
EDIT
Näyttöruudussa näkyy PRESET, sitten vilkkuva MEM
ja tallennuksen numero.
3 Paina
PRESET +/-
ja valitse haluamasi
tallennuskohta.
4 Paina
ENTER
.
Numeron vilkkuminen loppuu ja kanava tallentuu.
Huomio
• Jos vastaanotin on irrotettuna verkkovirrasta noin
kuukauden ajan, kaikki kanavamuistit tyhjenevät ja ne
on ohjelmoitava uudestaan.
• Kanavat tallennetaan stereona. Jos tallennus tehdään
FM MONO-tilassa, muistista ladatussa näkyy ST.
Kanavatallennusten kuuntelu
Kanavia on ensin tallennettava tätä varten. Katso ohje
tallennuksesta ylempää.
Paina
PRESET +/-
ja valitse haluamasi tallennus.
23
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
4
Perussoitto
Basic playback
4
4
23
2
35
4
…
Press
PRESET +/–
to select the station preset you
want.
Naming preset stations
For easier identification, you can name all of your preset
stations.
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets above for how to do this.
2
Press
EDIT
twice.
The cursor at the first character position is blinking on
the display.
3
Input the name you want.
Choose a name up to eight characters long.
•
Use
PRESET +/–
to select character position.
•
Use
TUNE +/–
to select characters.
•
The name is stored when
ENTER
is pressed.
Tip
•
To erase a station name, follow steps 1 and 2, and press
ENTER
while the display is blank. Press
EDIT
while the
display is blank, to keep the previous name.
•
Once you have named a station preset, Press
DISP
to
show the name. When you want to return to the frequency
display, press
DISP
several times to show the frequency.
An introduction to RDS (For Europe)
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of show
they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:
Note
•
In addition, there are three other program types, ALARM,
ALARMTST, and NO TYPE. ALARM and ALARMTST
are used for emergency announcements. NO TYPE
appears when a program type cannot be found.
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1
Press
TUN
then press
BAND
to select the FM band.
•
RDS is only possible in the FM band.
2
Press
PTY
.
SEARCH shows in the display.
3
Press
PRESET +/–
to select the program type you
want to hear.
4
Press
ENTER
to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through the station presets for a
match, stopping when it was found one. Repeat to search for
other stations.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find that
program type at the time of the search.
RDS searches station presets only. If no stations have been
preset, or if the program type could not be found among the
station presets NO PTY is displayed.
FINISH means the search is complete.
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or
regional culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows
or interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’
classical music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market
reports, commerce, trading,
etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public
expressing their views by
phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular music in
a language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from
the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIOBT AUDIO
TRE
BASS
CBLBD
S
.
BOX
CD
GAME
TV
USBTUN
AUX
BT
DISP
TUNER
EDIT SLEEP
TUNE
+
TUNE
+
TUNE
-
TUNE
-
STATUS
PRESET
-
PRESET
-
PRESET
+
PRESET
+
BAND
Tallennettujen kanavien nimeäminen
1 Valitse tallennus, jolle haluat antaa nimen.
Katso Kanavatallennusten kuuntelu, sivu 22.
2 Paina
EDIT
kahdesti.
Näytössä vilkkuu kursori ensimmäisen merkin
kohdalla.
3 Syötä haluamasi nimi.
Valitse enintään kahdeksan merkkiä pitkä nimi.
• Valitse merkin paikka näppäimillä
PRESET +/-
.
• Valitse merkki näppäimillä
TUNE +/-
.
• Nimi tallennetaan painamalla
ENTER
.
Vihje
• Kanavan nimi voidaan poistaa tekemällä vaiheet 1 ja 2
ja paina
ENTER
, kun näyttö on tyhjä. Jos painat
EDIT
,
kun näyttö on tyhjä, aiempi nimi säilyy.
• Kun kanava on nimetty, voit katsoa nimen painamalla
DISP
. Palaa taajuusnäyttöön painamalla
DISP
useita
kertoja, kunnes taajuus näkyy.
RDS:n esittely
Useimmat radiokanavat käyttävät Radio Data Systemiä
(RDS) antamaan kuuntelijalle erilaisia tietoja, kuten esim.
kanavan nimi ja kuunneltavan ohjelman tyyppi.
Yksi RDS:n ominaisuus on ohjelmahaku tyypin
perusteella. Voit esimerkiksi hakea kanavaa, joka lähettää
ohjelmaa tyyppiä JAZZ.
Haettavissa ovat seuraavat ohjelmatyypit:
News = uutiset
Affair = ajankohtaisohjelmat
Info = yleistieto
Sport = urheilu
Educate = koulutus
Drama = draama, kuunnelmat jne.
Culture = kansallinen tai paikallinen kulttuuri, teatteri ym.
Science = tiede ja teknologia
Varied = puheohjelmat
Pop m = pop-musiikki
Rock m = rock-musiikki
Easy m = kevyttä kuunneltavaa
Light m = kepeitä klassikoita
Classics = vakavampaa klassista musiikkia
Other m = muu musiikki
Weather = sää
Finance = talous
Children = lastenohjelmat
Social = yhteiskunnalliset asiat
Religion = uskonto
Phone in = ohjelmat, joihin voi osallistua puhelimella
Travel = matkailu ja lomailu
Leisure = vapaa-aika ja harrastukset
Jazz = jazz
Country = kantria
Nation m = kansallinen musiikki
Oldies = ikivihreät 50- ja 60-luvun sävelmät
Folk m = kansanmusiikki
Document = dokumenttiohjelmat
Huomio
• Näiden lisäksi on kolme ohjelmatyyppiä, ALARM,
ALARMTST ja NO TYPE.
ALARM ja ALARMTST ovat hätätiedotteita varten. NO
TYPE ilmaisee, että ohjelman tyyppiä ei ole havaittu.
RDS-ohjelmien haku
1 Paina
TUN
ja sen jälkeen
BAND
ja valitse
FM-kaista.
• RDS on mahdollinen vain FM:n kautta.
2 Paina
PTY
.
Näytössä näkyy Search.
3 Valitse haluamasi ohjelmatyyppi näppäimillä
PRESET +/-
.
4 Paina
ENTER
ja käynnistä ohjelmatyypin haku.
Järjestelmä hakee tallennuksista sopivuutta ja pysähtyy
kun sellainen löytyy. Tee sama uudestaan muille
kanaville.
RDS etsii vain tallennetuista kanavista. Jos tallennuksia
ei ole tai tallennuksista ei löydy sopivuutta, näytössä on
NO PTY.
FINISH ilmaisee, että haku on tehty.
24
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
4
4
Perussoitto
Basic playback
4
4
24
2
35
4
Displaying RDS information
Use the
DISP
button to display the different types of RDS
information available.
…
Press
DISP
for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
•
Listening mode
•
Master volume
•
Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
•
Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
•
Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
•
Current tuner frequency (FREQ)
Note
•
If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll,
some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
•
If you see NO TEXT in the RT display, it means no RT data
is sent from the broadcast station. The display will
automatically switch to the PS data display (if no PS data,
NO NAME is displayed).
•
In the PTY display, NO PTY may be shown.
•
Special characters not supported by the unit may appear
as spaces.
Listening to DAB Digital Radio
1
Press
TUN
then press
BAND
to select DAB.
•
The very first time you select DAB, the Auto Tuning
function automatically scans the DAB Band 3 for the
multiplexes (i.e., stations) available in your area.
•
Once the scanning process is complete, the first
station that was detected is selected.
•
If a new DAB station is introduced, or you move to a
new area, press
HOME MENU
button on the remote
controller, then in the Home Menu displayed set "DAB
Setup"– "DAB SCAN". See DAB Scan
on page 34.
2
Select the desired radio station with
TUNE +/–
.
Changing the order stations are displayed
You can sort the available stations alphabetically or by
multiplex.
…
Press
PTY
repeatedly to set the method for sorting the
display order from the following.
•
Alphabet (default setting): Sort stations
alphabetically.
•
Multiplex : Sort stations by multiplex.
Displaying DAB Radio Information
…
Press
DISP
repeatedly to display more information
about the selected DAB station.
•
DLS (Dynamic Label Segment): When tuned to a
station that's broadcasting DLS text data, the text will
scroll across the display.
•
Program Type: Displays the type of program.
Bit Rate and Audio Mode: Displays the station's bit
rate and audio mode (Stereo, Mono).
•
Quality: Displays the signal quality.
0 - 59: Poor reception
60 - 79: Good reception
80 - 100: Excellent reception
•
Multiplex Name: Displays the name of the current
multiplex.
•
Multiplex Number and Frequency: Displays the
number and frequency of the current multiplex.
RDS-tiedon näyttö
Valitse näppäimellä
DISP
näyttöön käytettävissä oleva
RDS-tieto.
Paina DISP ja saat RDS-tietoa
Joka painalluksella näyttö vaihtuu seuraavasti:
• Kuuntelutila
• Äänenvoimakkuus
• Radio Text (RT) – Kanavan lähettämiä
viestejä. Esimerkiksi puhekanava voi ilmoittaa
puhelinnumeronsa RT:ssa.
• Ohjelman palvelunimi (PS) – Radiokanavan nimi
• Ohjelmatyyppi (PTY) – Ilmaisee parhaillaan
kuunneltavan ohjelman tyypin.
• Virittimen tämänhetkinen taajuus (FREQ).
Huomio
• Jos RT:n vieritysnäytön aikana vastaanotetaan häiriöitä,
jotkut merkit eivät näy oikein.
• Jos RT-näytössä on NO TEXT, kanava ei lähetä RT-
dataa. Näyttöön vaihtuu automaattisesti PS-data ja jos
sitä ei ole, näytössä on NO NAME.
• PTY-näytössä voi näkyä NO PTY.
• Merkit, joita järjestelmä ei tue, näkyvät tyhjinä.
DAB-digitaaliradion kuuntelu
1 Paina
TUN
ja sen jälkeen
BAND
ja valitse DAB.
• Kun ensi kerran valitset DAB:n, Auto Tuning-
toiminto etsii automaattisesti DAB-kaista 3:lta
alueellasi kuuluvat multipleksit (kanavaniput).
• Kun haku on valmis, valitaan ensimmäinen löydetty
kanava.
• Kun havaitaan uusi DAB-asema tai muutat uudelle
alueelle, paina kaukosäätimen
HOME MENU
ja
valikosta valitse ”DAB Setup” – ”DAB SCAN”. Katso
DAB-haku, sivu 34.
2 Valitse haluamasi radiokanava näppäimillä
TUNE
+/-
.
Vaihda asemien näyttämisen järjestys
Voit lajitella käytettävissä olevat kanavat
aakkosjärjestykseen tai multiplekseinä.
Paina useita kertoja
PTY
ja valitse näyttämisen
järjestys seuraavista:
• Alphabet (oletus): Lajittelu aakkosjärjestyksessä
• Multiplex: Lajittelu kanavanippuina
DAB-radiotiedon näyttäminen
Paina useita kertoja
DISP
ja saat näyttöön
enemmän tietoa valitsemastasi DAB-kanavasta.
• DLS (Dynamic Label Segment): Kun viritettynä
on DLS-tekstitietoa lähettävä kanava, tekstiä
vieritetään näyttöruudussa.
• Program Type: Näyttää ohjelman tyypin.
• Bit Rate and Audio Mode: Näyttää kanavan
bittinopeuden ja audiotilan (Stereo, Mono).
• Quality: Näyttää signaalin tason
0–59: Heikko vastaanotto
60–79: Hyvä vastaanotto
80–100: Erinomainen vastaanotto
• Multiplex Name: Näyttää tämänhetkisen
kanavanipun nimen.
• Multiplex Number and Frequency: Näyttää
tämänhetkisen kanavanipun numeron ja taajuuden.
25
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
5
Kuuntelu laitteistolla
5
5
5
25
2
35
4
Listening to your system
Choosing the listening mode
This receiver offers a variety of listening modes to
accommodate playback of various audio formats. Choose
one according to your speaker environment or the source.
…
While listening to a source, press the listening mode
button repeatedly to select a listening mode you want.
•
The listening mode is shown on the display on the front
panel.
Important
•
The listening modes and many features described in this
section may not be available depending on the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
The simplest, most direct listening option is the AUTO
SURROUND feature. With this, the receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
•
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
repeatedly until
AUTO SURROUND
shows briefly in the display (it will then show the decoding or
playback format). Check the digital format indicators in the
display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
•
Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly
using NEO:6 CINEMA (see Listening in surround sound
below for more on these decoding formats).
•
When listening to the BT AUDIO input, the Advanced
Sound Retriever AIR feature is selected automatically.
Advanced Sound Retriever AIR:
Suitable for listening to the sound from a BLUETOOTH
wireless technology device.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround
sound. However, the options available will depend on your
speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
•
If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be
selected and shows in the display.
When you select STEREO ALC (Auto Level Control stereo
mode), this unit equalizes playback sound levels if each
sound level varies with the music source recorded in a
portable audio player.
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source through
just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed to
stereo.
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo
and multichannel sources.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
BASS
VOLUME
AUX
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Type of surround modes Suitable sources
Two channel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
DOLBY PLII MOVIE Movie
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
a
Music
DOLBY PLII GAME Video games
NEO:6 CINEMA
b
Movie
NEO:6 MUSIC
b
Music
DOLBY PRO LOGIC Old movies
STEREO
c
See above.
ALC/
STANDARD
ALC/
STANDARD SURR
5
5
25
2
35
4
Listening to your system
Choosing the listening mode
This receiver offers a variety of listening modes to
accommodate playback of various audio formats. Choose
one according to your speaker environment or the source.
…
While listening to a source, press the listening mode
button repeatedly to select a listening mode you want.
•
The listening mode is shown on the display on the front
panel.
Important
•
The listening modes and many features described in this
section may not be available depending on the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
The simplest, most direct listening option is the AUTO
SURROUND feature. With this, the receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
•
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
repeatedly until
AUTO SURROUND
shows briefly in the display (it will then show the decoding or
playback format). Check the digital format indicators in the
display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
•
Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly
using NEO:6 CINEMA (see Listening in surround sound
below for more on these decoding formats).
•
When listening to the BT AUDIO input, the Advanced
Sound Retriever AIR feature is selected automatically.
Advanced Sound Retriever AIR:
Suitable for listening to the sound from a BLUETOOTH
wireless technology device.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround
sound. However, the options available will depend on your
speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
•
If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be
selected and shows in the display.
When you select STEREO ALC (Auto Level Control stereo
mode), this unit equalizes playback sound levels if each
sound level varies with the music source recorded in a
portable audio player.
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source through
just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed to
stereo.
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo
and multichannel sources.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
BASS
VOLUME
AUX
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Type of surround modes Suitable sources
Two channel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
DOLBY PLII MOVIE Movie
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
a
Music
DOLBY PLII GAME Video games
NEO:6 CINEMA
b
Movie
NEO:6 MUSIC
b
Music
DOLBY PRO LOGIC Old movies
STEREO
c
See above.
ALC/
STANDARD
ALC/
STANDARD SURR
5
5
25
2
35
4
Listening to your system
Choosing the listening mode
This receiver offers a variety of listening modes to
accommodate playback of various audio formats. Choose
one according to your speaker environment or the source.
…
While listening to a source, press the listening mode
button repeatedly to select a listening mode you want.
•
The listening mode is shown on the display on the front
panel.
Important
•
The listening modes and many features described in this
section may not be available depending on the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
The simplest, most direct listening option is the AUTO
SURROUND feature. With this, the receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
•
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
repeatedly until
AUTO SURROUND
shows briefly in the display (it will then show the decoding or
playback format). Check the digital format indicators in the
display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
•
Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly
using NEO:6 CINEMA (see Listening in surround sound
below for more on these decoding formats).
•
When listening to the BT AUDIO input, the Advanced
Sound Retriever AIR feature is selected automatically.
Advanced Sound Retriever AIR:
Suitable for listening to the sound from a BLUETOOTH
wireless technology device.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround
sound. However, the options available will depend on your
speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
•
If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be
selected and shows in the display.
When you select STEREO ALC (Auto Level Control stereo
mode), this unit equalizes playback sound levels if each
sound level varies with the music source recorded in a
portable audio player.
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source through
just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed to
stereo.
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo
and multichannel sources.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
BASS
VOLUME
AUX
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Type of surround modes Suitable sources
Two channel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
DOLBY PLII MOVIE Movie
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
a
Music
DOLBY PLII GAME Video games
NEO:6 CINEMA
b
Movie
NEO:6 MUSIC
b
Music
DOLBY PRO LOGIC Old movies
STEREO
c
See above.
ALC/
STANDARD
ALC/
STANDARD SURR
5
5
25
2
35
4
Listening to your system
Choosing the listening mode
This receiver offers a variety of listening modes to
accommodate playback of various audio formats. Choose
one according to your speaker environment or the source.
…
While listening to a source, press the listening mode
button repeatedly to select a listening mode you want.
•
The listening mode is shown on the display on the front
panel.
Important
•
The listening modes and many features described in this
section may not be available depending on the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
The simplest, most direct listening option is the AUTO
SURROUND feature. With this, the receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
•
Press
AUTO/DIRECT
repeatedly until
AUTO SURROUND
shows briefly in the display (it will then show the decoding or
playback format). Check the digital format indicators in the
display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
•
Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly
using NEO:6 CINEMA (see Listening in surround sound
below for more on these decoding formats).
•
When listening to the BT AUDIO input, the Advanced
Sound Retriever AIR feature is selected automatically.
Advanced Sound Retriever AIR:
Suitable for listening to the sound from a BLUETOOTH
wireless technology device.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround
sound. However, the options available will depend on your
speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
•
If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be
selected and shows in the display.
When you select STEREO ALC (Auto Level Control stereo
mode), this unit equalizes playback sound levels if each
sound level varies with the music source recorded in a
portable audio player.
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source through
just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed to
stereo.
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo
and multichannel sources.
PHASE
S.RETRIEVER
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
BASS
VOLUME
AUX
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Type of surround modes Suitable sources
Two channel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
DOLBY PLII MOVIE Movie
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
a
Music
DOLBY PLII GAME Video games
NEO:6 CINEMA
b
Movie
NEO:6 MUSIC
b
Music
DOLBY PRO LOGIC Old movies
STEREO
c
See above.
ALC/
STANDARD
ALC/
STANDARD SURR
Valitse kuuntelutila
Vastaanotin tarjoaa useita kuuntelutiloja erilaisille
audioformaateille. Valitse niistä sopivin kaiutinasennuksen
tai äänilähteen perusteella.
Kun kuuntelet äänilähdettä, valitse haluamasi
kuuntelutila painamalla kuuntelutilan
valintanäppäimiä.
• Tila näkyy etulevyn näyttöruudussa.
Tärkeä
• Kuuntelutilaa ja sille kuvattuja ominaisuuksia ei aina
voi valita, riippuen äänilähteestä, asetuksista ja
vastaanottimen tilasta.
Auto playback
Yksinkertaisin ja suoraviivaisin kuuntelutila on AUTO
SURROUND. Siinä vastaanotin havaitsee automaattisesti
soitettavan lähteen tyypin ja valitsee tilanteen mukaan
monikanavaisen tai stereosoiton.
• Paina
AUTO/DIRECT
useita kertoja, kunnes
näyttöruudussa näkyy pikaisesti AUTO SURROUND
(ja tämän jälkeen dekoodauksen ja soiton formaatit).
Katso näytöstä digitaalisen formaatin ilmaisimet ja näet,
kuinka äänilähdettä prosessoidaan.
Huomio
• Stereo surround-formaatit dekoodataan käyttäen NEO:6
CINEMAa (katso lisää dekoodauksen formaateista
alempaa: Surroundäänen kuuntelu).
• Advanced Sound Retriever AIR-ominaisuus valitaan
automaattisesti kuunneltaessa BT AUDIO -tuloa.
Advanced Sound Retriever AIR:
Soveltuu äänen kuunteluun langattomasta
BLUETOOTH-laitteesta.
Surroundäänen kuuntelu
Tällä vastaanottimella voit kuunnella kaikkia äänilähteitä
surroundäänellä. Käytettävissä olevat ominaisuudet
riippuvat kuitenkin kuunneltavasta lähteestä ja
kaiutinasennuksista.
• Jos äänilähteen koodauksena on Dolby Digital, DTS tai
Dolby Surround, näille valitaan automaattisesti sopiva
dekoodaus, mikä näkyy näyttöruudussa.
Kun valitset STEREO ALC (Auto Level Control
-stereotila), laite tasoittaa soiton äänentasot, jos ne
vaihtelevat kannettavalla soittimella tallentamisen vuoksi.
Kun valitset STEREO, ääni kuuluu vain vasemmasta ja
oikeasta etukaiuttimesta (ja asetuksista riippuen, ehkä
alataajuuskaiuttimesta). Monikanavaiset Dolby Digital- ja
DTS-äänilähteet miksataan stereoksi.
Seuraavissa tiloissa saat stereo- ja monikanavaisille
äänilähteille perussurroundäänen.
Surroundtilan tyyppi Sopivat äänilähteet
Kaksikanavaiset lähteet
Katso yllä
Elokuva
Musiikki
Videopelit
Elokuva
Musiikki
Vanhat elokuvat
Katso yllä
26
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
5
Kuuntelu laitteistolla
5
Listening to your system
5
5
26
2
35
4
a. You can also adjust the C.WIDTH, DIMEN., and PNRM. effect
(see Setting the Audio options on page 27).
b. You can also adjust the C.IMG effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 27).
c. You can choose the STEREO mode by using
STEREO
button.
The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can
still use the Midnight, Loudness, Phase Control, Advanced
Sound Retriever and Tone functions.
Using the Advanced surround
The Advanced surround feature creates a variety of surround
effects. Try different modes with various soundtracks to see
which you like.
Note
•
During ECO mode, the brightness switches between 2
levels. If the dimmest level is selected, DIMMER will be
shown on the display. (Mode other than ECO: 4 levels,
ECO mode: 2 levels)
•
ECO MODE will switch OFF automatically when switched
to other listening modes (Advanced surround mode and
Auto surround mode).
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed.
Multichannel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
Straight Decode No additional effects
STEREO
c
See above.
ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks.
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog.
ADVANCED
GAME
Suitable for video games.
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs.
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-type sound.
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and/
or pop music.
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers.
F.S.S.ADVANCE
(Front Stage
Surround
ADVANCE)
Allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Use to provide a rich surround sound effect
directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
PHONES SURR When listening through headphones, you
can still get the effect of overall surround.
ECO 1 Cut back on power consumption. Suitable
for contents that are mainly high level
(mainly music).
ECO 2 Cut back on even more power
consumption than ECO 1. Suitable for
contents with wider dynamic range (mainly
movies).
ADV SURR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
AUTO
SURROUND
See
Auto playback
on page 25.
DIRECT Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Manual SP Setup
(speaker setting, X.Over, channel level,
speaker distance), as well as with dual
mono settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the
signal.
Phase Control, Acoustic Calibration EQ,
Sound Delay, Fixed PCM, SACD Gain,
HDMI Audio, Auto Delay and LFE
Attenuate functions are available.
PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Listening to your system
5
5
26
2
35
4
a. You can also adjust the C.WIDTH, DIMEN., and PNRM. effect
(see Setting the Audio options on page 27).
b. You can also adjust the C.IMG effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 27).
c. You can choose the STEREO mode by using
STEREO
button.
The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can
still use the Midnight, Loudness, Phase Control, Advanced
Sound Retriever and Tone functions.
Using the Advanced surround
The Advanced surround feature creates a variety of surround
effects. Try different modes with various soundtracks to see
which you like.
Note
•
During ECO mode, the brightness switches between 2
levels. If the dimmest level is selected, DIMMER will be
shown on the display. (Mode other than ECO: 4 levels,
ECO mode: 2 levels)
•
ECO MODE will switch OFF automatically when switched
to other listening modes (Advanced surround mode and
Auto surround mode).
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed.
Multichannel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
Straight Decode No additional effects
STEREO
c
See above.
ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks.
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog.
ADVANCED
GAME
Suitable for video games.
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs.
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-type sound.
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and/
or pop music.
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers.
F.S.S.ADVANCE
(Front Stage
Surround
ADVANCE)
Allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Use to provide a rich surround sound effect
directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
PHONES SURR When listening through headphones, you
can still get the effect of overall surround.
ECO 1 Cut back on power consumption. Suitable
for contents that are mainly high level
(mainly music).
ECO 2 Cut back on even more power
consumption than ECO 1. Suitable for
contents with wider dynamic range (mainly
movies).
ADV SURR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
AUTO
SURROUND
See Auto playback on page 25.
DIRECT Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Manual SP Setup
(speaker setting, X.Over, channel level,
speaker distance), as well as with dual
mono settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the
signal.
Phase Control, Acoustic Calibration EQ,
Sound Delay, Fixed PCM, SACD Gain,
HDMI Audio, Auto Delay and LFE
Attenuate functions are available.
PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Listening to your system
5
5
26
2
35
4
a. You can also adjust the C.WIDTH, DIMEN., and PNRM. effect
(see Setting the Audio options on page 27).
b. You can also adjust the C.IMG effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 27).
c. You can choose the STEREO mode by using
STEREO
button.
The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can
still use the Midnight, Loudness, Phase Control, Advanced
Sound Retriever and Tone functions.
Using the Advanced surround
The Advanced surround feature creates a variety of surround
effects. Try different modes with various soundtracks to see
which you like.
Note
•
During ECO mode, the brightness switches between 2
levels. If the dimmest level is selected, DIMMER will be
shown on the display. (Mode other than ECO: 4 levels,
ECO mode: 2 levels)
•
ECO MODE will switch OFF automatically when switched
to other listening modes (Advanced surround mode and
Auto surround mode).
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed.
Multichannel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
Straight Decode No additional effects
STEREO
c
See above.
ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks.
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog.
ADVANCED
GAME
Suitable for video games.
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs.
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-type sound.
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and/
or pop music.
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers.
F.S.S.ADVANCE
(Front Stage
Surround
ADVANCE)
Allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Use to provide a rich surround sound effect
directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
PHONES SURR When listening through headphones, you
can still get the effect of overall surround.
ECO 1 Cut back on power consumption. Suitable
for contents that are mainly high level
(mainly music).
ECO 2 Cut back on even more power
consumption than ECO 1. Suitable for
contents with wider dynamic range (mainly
movies).
ADV SURR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
AUTO
SURROUND
See Auto playback on page 25.
DIRECT Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Manual SP Setup
(speaker setting, X.Over, channel level,
speaker distance), as well as with dual
mono settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the
signal.
Phase Control, Acoustic Calibration EQ,
Sound Delay, Fixed PCM, SACD Gain,
HDMI Audio, Auto Delay and LFE
Attenuate functions are available.
PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Listening to your system
5
5
26
2
35
4
a. You can also adjust the C.WIDTH, DIMEN., and PNRM. effect
(see Setting the Audio options
on page 27).
b. You can also adjust the C.IMG effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 27).
c. You can choose the STEREO mode by using
STEREO
button.
The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can
still use the Midnight, Loudness, Phase Control, Advanced
Sound Retriever and Tone functions.
Using the Advanced surround
The Advanced surround feature creates a variety of surround
effects. Try different modes with various soundtracks to see
which you like.
Note
•
During ECO mode, the brightness switches between 2
levels. If the dimmest level is selected, DIMMER will be
shown on the display. (Mode other than ECO: 4 levels,
ECO mode: 2 levels)
•
ECO MODE will switch OFF automatically when switched
to other listening modes (Advanced surround mode and
Auto surround mode).
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed.
Multichannel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
Straight Decode No additional effects
STEREO
c
See above.
ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks.
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog.
ADVANCED
GAME
Suitable for video games.
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs.
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-type sound.
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and/
or pop music.
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers.
F.S.S.ADVANCE
(Front Stage
Surround
ADVANCE)
Allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Use to provide a rich surround sound effect
directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
PHONES SURR When listening through headphones, you
can still get the effect of overall surround.
ECO 1 Cut back on power consumption. Suitable
for contents that are mainly high level
(mainly music).
ECO 2 Cut back on even more power
consumption than ECO 1. Suitable for
contents with wider dynamic range (mainly
movies).
ADV SURR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
AUTO
SURROUND
See Auto playback on page 25.
DIRECT Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Manual SP Setup
(speaker setting, X.Over, channel level,
speaker distance), as well as with dual
mono settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the
signal.
Phase Control, Acoustic Calibration EQ,
Sound Delay, Fixed PCM, SACD Gain,
HDMI Audio, Auto Delay and LFE
Attenuate functions are available.
PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
Listening to your system
5
5
26
2
35
4
a. You can also adjust the C.WIDTH, DIMEN., and PNRM. effect
(see Setting the Audio options
on page 27).
b. You can also adjust the C.IMG effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 27).
c. You can choose the STEREO mode by using
STEREO
button.
The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can
still use the Midnight, Loudness, Phase Control, Advanced
Sound Retriever and Tone functions.
Using the Advanced surround
The Advanced surround feature creates a variety of surround
effects. Try different modes with various soundtracks to see
which you like.
Note
•
During ECO mode, the brightness switches between 2
levels. If the dimmest level is selected, DIMMER will be
shown on the display. (Mode other than ECO: 4 levels,
ECO mode: 2 levels)
•
ECO MODE will switch OFF automatically when switched
to other listening modes (Advanced surround mode and
Auto surround mode).
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed.
Multichannel sources
STEREO ALC See above.
Straight Decode No additional effects
STEREO
c
See above.
ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks.
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog.
ADVANCED
GAME
Suitable for video games.
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs.
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-type sound.
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and/
or pop music.
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers.
F.S.S.ADVANCE
(Front Stage
Surround
ADVANCE)
Allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Use to provide a rich surround sound effect
directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
PHONES SURR When listening through headphones, you
can still get the effect of overall surround.
ECO 1 Cut back on power consumption. Suitable
for contents that are mainly high level
(mainly music).
ECO 2 Cut back on even more power
consumption than ECO 1. Suitable for
contents with wider dynamic range (mainly
movies).
ADV SURR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
AUTO
SURROUND
See Auto playback on page 25.
DIRECT Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Manual SP Setup
(speaker setting, X.Over, channel level,
speaker distance), as well as with dual
mono settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the
signal.
Phase Control, Acoustic Calibration EQ,
Sound Delay, Fixed PCM, SACD Gain,
HDMI Audio, Auto Delay and LFE
Attenuate functions are available.
PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
AUTO/
DIRECT
AUTO SURROUND
/
STREAM DIRECT
a Voit säätää efektejä C.WIDTH, DIMEN. ja PNRM.
(katso Audion asetuksien valitseminen, sivu 27)
b Voit säätää efektiä C.IMG (katso Audion asetuksien
valitseminen, sivu 27).
c Voit valita stereotilan painamalla näppäintä
STEREO
.
Audio kuuluu valitsemillasi surroundasetuksilla ja voit
edelleen valita toiminnot Midnight, Loudness, Phase
Control, Advanced Sound Retriever ja Tone.
Monikanavaiset lähteet
Katso yllä
Ei lisättyjä efektejä
Katso yllä
Laajennetun surroundin käyttö
Laajennettu surround (Advanced surround) luo erilaisia
surroundtehosteita. Kokeile näitä erilaisten ääniraitojen
kanssa ja löydät mieleisesi.
Huomio
• ECO-tilassa näyttöruudun kirkkaus vaihtelee kahden
arvon välillä. Jos valittuna on himmein arvo, näytössä
näkyy DIMMER (Muissa tiloissa kirkkauksia on neljä,
ECO-tilassa kaksi).
• ECO-tila on automaattisesti pois käytöstä, kun siirrytään
muihin kuuntelutiloihin (Advanced Surround ja Auto
Surround)
Stream Directin käyttö
Käytä Stream Direct -tiloja, kun haluat kuulla äänilähteen
aidoimmillaan. Kaikki tarpeettomat signaaliprosessoinnit
ohitetaan.
Vasen
etukaiutin
Oikea
etukaiutin
Suunniteltu toimintaelokuville,
joissa on dynaaminen ääniraita.
Suunniteltu elokuville, joissa on paljon puhetta.
Sopiva videopeleille.
Sopiva urheiluohjelmille
Iso, konserttisalimainen ääni.
Eläväinen konserttisoundi
rock- ja/tai popmusiikille.
Tekee stereolähteeseen monikanavaisuu-
den tunnun käyttäen kaikkia kaiuttimia.
Luo luonnollisia surroundefektejä pelkästään
etukaiuttimilla ja alataajuuskaiuttimella.
Saat täyteläisen surroundvaikutelman
kohdistettuna keskelle, jossa vasemman ja
oikean etukaiuttimen projektiot kohtaavat
Saat surroundvaikutelman kuunellessasi
kuulokkeilla.
Säästää virrankulutusta. Sopii sisällölle, jolla
on voimakas äänentaso (kuten musiikki).
Säästää vielä enemmän virrankulutusta
kuin ECO 1. Sopii sisällölle, jossa on laaja
dynamiikka (elokuvat).
Katso Auto playback, sivu 25.
Äänilähde kuuluu kohtien Manual SP
Setup sekä dual mono asetuksien mukaan
(kaiutinasetukset, X.Over, kanavataso,
kaiuttimien etäisyys). Kuulet äänen
signaalin kanavien määrän mukaisesti.
Toiminnot Phase Control, Acoustic
Calibration EQ, Sound Delay, Fixed PCM,
SACD Gain, HDMI Audio, Auto Delay ja
LFE Attenuate ovat käytettävissä.
Analogiset ja PCM-äänilähteet kuuluvat
ilman mitään digitaalista prosessointia.
27
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
5
5
Kuuntelu laitteistolla
Listening to your system
5
5
27
2
35
4
Using the Advanced Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the compression
process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Advanced Sound Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
…
Press
S.RETRIEVER
to switch the S.RTV (Advanced
Sound Retriever) ON or OFF.
Note
• The Advanced Sound Retriever mode cannot be set to
ON
,
when the
DIRECT
mode or the
PURE DIRECT
mode is
switched on.
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction
measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the
listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion
and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The default
setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control
switched on for all sound sources.
…
Press
PHASE
to switch the P.CTL (Phase Control) ON
or OFF.
Note
• Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper
sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they
crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude,
clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave
meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
•
If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the
plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually
feel when Phase Control is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your
subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended
you try changing the orientation or the place of your
subwoofer.
•
Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to
OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
•
If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not
have a maximized Phase Control effect.
•
The Phase Control mode cannot be set to ON in the
following cases:
-
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
-
When the headphones are connected.
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AV ADJUST menu. The defaults, if not
stated, are listed in bold.
Important
•
Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV ADJUST
menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings
and status of the receiver.
1
Press
AV ADJUST
button.
2
Use
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check
the table below for notes on this.
3
Use
/
to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Press
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
PHASEPHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIO
BASS
USBTUN
AUX
BT
AV
ADJUST
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
Setting/What it does Option(s)
EQ (Acoustic Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effect of Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
ON
OFF
S.DLY (Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when
showing video, so the soundtrack will be
slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
0 ms to 500 ms
(1 step : 5 ms)
Default: 0
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS
The MIDNIGHT allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low volumes.
The
LOUDNESS
is used to get good bass and
treble from music sources at low volumes.
M/L OFF
MIDNIGHT
LOUDNESS
S.RTV (Advanced Sound Retriever)
a
Switches on/off the effect of Advanced Sound
Retriever. (see Using the Advanced Sound
Retriever above)
OFF
b
ON
DUAL MONO
c
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby
Digital soundtracks should be played.
CH1 – Channel 1
is heard only
CH2 – Channel 2
is heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both
channels heard
from front
speakers
Listening to your system
5
5
27
2
35
4
Using the Advanced Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the compression
process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Advanced Sound Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
…
Press
S.RETRIEVER
to switch the S.RTV (Advanced
Sound Retriever) ON or OFF.
Note
• The Advanced Sound Retriever mode cannot be set to
ON
,
when the
DIRECT
mode or the
PURE DIRECT
mode is
switched on.
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction
measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the
listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion
and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The default
setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control
switched on for all sound sources.
…
Press
PHASE
to switch the P.CTL (Phase Control) ON
or OFF.
Note
• Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper
sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they
crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude,
clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave
meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
•
If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the
plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually
feel when Phase Control is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your
subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended
you try changing the orientation or the place of your
subwoofer.
•
Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to
OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
•
If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not
have a maximized Phase Control effect.
•
The Phase Control mode cannot be set to ON in the
following cases:
-
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
-
When the headphones are connected.
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AV ADJUST menu. The defaults, if not
stated, are listed in bold.
Important
•
Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV ADJUST
menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings
and status of the receiver.
1
Press
AV ADJUST
button.
2
Use
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check
the table below for notes on this.
3
Use
/
to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Press
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
PHASEPHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIO
BASS
USBTUN
AUX
BT
AV
ADJUST
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
Setting/What it does Option(s)
EQ (Acoustic Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effect of Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
ON
OFF
S.DLY (Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when
showing video, so the soundtrack will be
slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
0 ms to 500 ms
(1 step : 5 ms)
Default: 0
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS
The MIDNIGHT allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low volumes.
The
LOUDNESS
is used to get good bass and
treble from music sources at low volumes.
M/L OFF
MIDNIGHT
LOUDNESS
S.RTV (Advanced Sound Retriever)
a
Switches on/off the effect of Advanced Sound
Retriever. (see Using the Advanced Sound
Retriever above)
OFF
b
ON
DUAL MONO
c
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby
Digital soundtracks should be played.
CH1 – Channel 1
is heard only
CH2 – Channel 2
is heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both
channels heard
from front
speakers
Listening to your system
5
5
27
2
35
4
Using the Advanced Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the compression
process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Advanced Sound Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
…
Press
S.RETRIEVER
to switch the S.RTV (Advanced
Sound Retriever) ON or OFF.
Note
• The Advanced Sound Retriever mode cannot be set to
ON
,
when the
DIRECT
mode or the
PURE DIRECT
mode is
switched on.
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction
measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the
listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion
and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The default
setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control
switched on for all sound sources.
…
Press
PHASE
to switch the P.CTL (Phase Control) ON
or OFF.
Note
• Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper
sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they
crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude,
clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave
meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
•
If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the
plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually
feel when Phase Control is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your
subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended
you try changing the orientation or the place of your
subwoofer.
•
Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to
OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
•
If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not
have a maximized Phase Control effect.
•
The Phase Control mode cannot be set to ON in the
following cases:
-
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
-
When the headphones are connected.
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AV ADJUST menu. The defaults, if not
stated, are listed in bold.
Important
•
Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV ADJUST
menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings
and status of the receiver.
1
Press
AV ADJUST
button.
2
Use
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check
the table below for notes on this.
3
Use
/
to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Press
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
PHASEPHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIO
BASS
USBTUN
AUX
BT
AV
ADJUST
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
Setting/What it does Option(s)
EQ (Acoustic Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effect of Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
ON
OFF
S.DLY (Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when
showing video, so the soundtrack will be
slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
0 ms to 500 ms
(1 step : 5 ms)
Default: 0
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS
The MIDNIGHT allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low volumes.
The
LOUDNESS
is used to get good bass and
treble from music sources at low volumes.
M/L OFF
MIDNIGHT
LOUDNESS
S.RTV (Advanced Sound Retriever)
a
Switches on/off the effect of Advanced Sound
Retriever. (see Using the Advanced Sound
Retriever above)
OFF
b
ON
DUAL MONO
c
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby
Digital soundtracks should be played.
CH1 – Channel 1
is heard only
CH2 – Channel 2
is heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both
channels heard
from front
speakers
Listening to your system
5
5
27
2
35
4
Using the Advanced Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the compression
process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Advanced Sound Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
…
Press
S.RETRIEVER
to switch the S.RTV (Advanced
Sound Retriever) ON or OFF.
Note
• The Advanced Sound Retriever mode cannot be set to
ON
,
when the
DIRECT
mode or the
PURE DIRECT
mode is
switched on.
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction
measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the
listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion
and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The default
setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control
switched on for all sound sources.
…
Press
PHASE
to switch the P.CTL (Phase Control) ON
or OFF.
Note
• Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper
sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they
crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude,
clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave
meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
•
If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the
plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually
feel when Phase Control is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your
subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended
you try changing the orientation or the place of your
subwoofer.
•
Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to
OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
•
If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not
have a maximized Phase Control effect.
•
The Phase Control mode cannot be set to ON in the
following cases:
-
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
-
When the headphones are connected.
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AV ADJUST menu. The defaults, if not
stated, are listed in bold.
Important
•
Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV ADJUST
menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings
and status of the receiver.
1
Press
AV ADJUST
button.
2
Use
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check
the table below for notes on this.
3
Use
/
to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Press
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
PHASEPHASE
S.RETRIEVER
BT AUDIO
BASS
USBTUN
AUX
BT
AV
ADJUST
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
Setting/What it does Option(s)
EQ (Acoustic Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effect of Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
ON
OFF
S.DLY (Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when
showing video, so the soundtrack will be
slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
0 ms to 500 ms
(1 step : 5 ms)
Default: 0
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS
The MIDNIGHT allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low volumes.
The
LOUDNESS
is used to get good bass and
treble from music sources at low volumes.
M/L OFF
MIDNIGHT
LOUDNESS
S.RTV (Advanced Sound Retriever)
a
Switches on/off the effect of Advanced Sound
Retriever. (see Using the Advanced Sound
Retriever above)
OFF
b
ON
DUAL MONO
c
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby
Digital soundtracks should be played.
CH1 – Channel 1
is heard only
CH2 – Channel 2
is heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both
channels heard
from front
speakers
Advanced Sound Retrieverin käyttö
Kun kompression yhteydessä poistetaan audiodataa,
äänenlaatu kärsii ja äänikuva on epätasainen.
Advanced Sound Retriever-toiminto hyödyntää uutta
DSP-teknologiaa ja palauttaa CD-tason äänenlaatua
kompressoituun kaksikanavaiseen audioon
muokkaamalla sen dynamiikkaa alkuperäisen kaltaiseksi
ja tasoittamalla kompression aiheuttamia vääristymiä.
Paina
S.RETRIEVER
, joka kytkee Advanced Sound
Retrieverin päälle ja pois.
Huomio
• Advanced Sound Retrieveriä ei voi käyttää, kun
kuuntelutilana on DIRECT tai PURE DIRECT.
Parempi ääni Phase Controlilla
Vastaanottimen Phase Control -toiminto tekee
vaihekorjauksen ja varmistaa, että äänet kuuluvat
kuuntelukohtaan samassa vaiheessa. Näin estetään
tarpeetonta säröytymistä ja/tai äänen värittymistä.
Phase Control -teknologia antaa tasaisen äänentoiston
sovittamalla äänikuvan vaiheet optimaalisesti
kuuntelukohtaan. Oletusarvona ominaisuus on päällä
ja suosittelemme Phase Controlin käyttöä kaikille
äänilähteille.
Paina
PHASE
, jokä kytkee P.CTL:n (Phase Control)
päälle ja pois.
Huomio
• Vaiheistuksen sovitus on tärkeä osa laadukasta
äänentoistoa. Jos kaksi ääniaaltoa ovat samassa
vaiheessa, ne vahvistavat, selkeyttävät ja täsmentävät
toisiaan. Jos taas ääniaallot ovat vastavaiheisia,
aiheutuu vaihevirhe ja äänikuva on epävakaa.
• Jos alataajuuskaiuttimessasi on vaihekytkin, aseta
siihen plus (+) (tai 0°). Tämän vastaanottimen
Phase Controlin vaikutuksen tuntuvuus riippuu
alataajuuskaiuttimesta. Säädä alataajuuskaiutin
vaikutuksen maksimoimiseksi. Voit myös kokeilla
alataajuuskaiuttimen paikkaa tai suuntausta.
• Aseta alataajuuskaiuttimesi sisäinen alipäästösuodin
pois päältä. Jos tätä ei voi tehdä, säädä päästötaajuus
ylempään arvoon.
• Jos kaiuttimien etäisyyksien asetuksia ei ole tehty
oikein, Phase Control-efekti ei ole parhaimmillaan.
• Phase Control-tilaa ei voi valita seuraavissa
tapauksissa:
- Kuuntelutilana on PURE DIRECT.
- Kuulokkeet on kytketty.
Audion asetuksien valitseminen
AV ADJUST -valikosta voit tehdä lukuisia lisäasetuksia
äänelle. Oletusarvot on esitetty lihavoituna.
Tärkeä
• Mikäli asetus ei näy AV ADJUST -valikossa, sitä ei voi
valita johtuen äänilähteestä tai vastaanottimen tilasta ja
asetuksista.
1 Paina näppäintä
AV ADJUST
.
2 Valitse säädettävä asetus näppäimillä .
3 Tee säädöt näppäimillä tarpeen mukaan.
4 Vahvista asetukset painamalla
RETURN
ja poistut
valikosta.
Asetus/Mitä se tekee Optiot
Kytkee akustisen kalibraation
ekvalisaattorin päälle/pois.
Joissakin näytöissä on viive videossa
ja ääniraita ei ole synkronisoitu kuvan
kanssa. Lisäämällä viivettä voit
sovittaa äänen vastaamaan kuvaa.
0 ms–500 ms
(askel: 5 ms)
Oletus: 0
MIDNIGHT mahdollistaa elokuvien
surround äänen tehollisen kuuntelun
hiljaisella voimakkuudella.
LOUDNESS antaa hyvän basson ja
diskantin musiikin hiljaisessa kuuntelussa.
Kytkee Advanced Sound Retriever-efektin
päälle ja pois (katso ylempää: Advanced
Sound Retrieverin käyttö).
Määrittelee dual mono -koodattujen
Dolby Digital -ääniraitojen soittamisen.
CH1 – Vain
kanava 1 kuuluu
CH2 – Vain
kanava 2 kuuluu
CH1 CH2
– Molemmat
kanavat kuuluvat
etukaiuttimista
28
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
5
5
Kuuntelu laitteistolla
Listening to your system
5
5
28
2
35
4
a. You can change the Advanced Sound Retriever feature at any
time by using
S.RETRIEVER
button.
b. The default setting when the USB and BT AUDIO inputs are
selected is ON.
c. This setting works only with dual mono encoded Dolby Digital
and DTS soundtracks.
d. This is not displayed by default. You need to change some
settings on this unit to display the menu. (see Displaying the
Fixed PCM Setting menu on page 29).
e.
The initial set
AUTO
is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select
MAX
or
MID
for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain
setting back to 0 dB.
g. This feature is only available when the connected display
supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability
(‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay
time unsuitable, set A.DLY to OFF and adjust the delay time
manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature of your
display, contact the manufacturer directly.
h.
Only available with 2-channel sources in
DOLBY PLII MUSIC
mode.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in NEO:6 CINEMA
and NEO:6 MUSIC mode.
F.PCM (Fixed PCM)
d
This is useful if you find there is a slight delay
before
OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a
CD, for instance.
When
ON
is selected, noise may be output during
playback of non-PCM sources. Please select
another input signal if this is a problem.
OFF
ON
DRC
(Dynamic Range Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie
soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to
use this feature when listening to surround
sound at low volumes).
AUTO
e
MAX
MID
OFF
LFE ATT
(LFE Attenuate)
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources
include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE
attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-
low bass tones from distorting the sound from
the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB,
which is the recommended value. When set
to –15 dB, the LFE is limited by the
respective degree. When OFF is selected, no
sound is output from the LFE channel.
0 (0 dB)
5 (–5 dB)
10 (–10 dB)
15 (–15 dB)
20 (–20 dB)
** (OFF)
SACD G.
(SACD Gain)
f
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the
dynamic range (during digital processing).
0 (0 dB)
+6 (+6 dB)
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio
signal out of this receiver (
AMP) or through to
a TV (
THRU). When THRU is selected, no
sound is output from this receiver.
AMP
THRU
A.DLY
(Auto Delay)
g
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-
video delay between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set
depending on the operational status of the
display connected with an HDMI cable. The
video delay time is automatically adjusted
according to the audio delay time.
OFF
ON
Setting/What it does Option(s)
C.WIDTH (Center Width)
h
(Applicable only when using a center speaker)
Spreads the center channel between the front right
and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher
settings) or narrower (lower settings).
Making the
C.WIDTH
setting “7” may cause no
sound to be output from the center channel.
0 to 7
Default: 3
DIMEN. (Dimension)
h
Adjusts the surround sound balance from
front to back, making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward (positive
settings).
–3 to +3
Default: 0
PNRM. (Panorama)
h
Extends the front stereo image to include
surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.
OFF
ON
C.IMG (Center Image)
i
(Applicable only when using a center speaker)
Adjust the center image to create a wider
stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect
from 0 (all center channel sent to front right
and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent
to the center speaker only).
0 to 10
Default: 3
(NEO:6 MUSIC),
10 (NEO:6
CINEMA)
Setting/What it does Option(s)
a. Advanced Sound Retriever-toimintoa voi muuttaa
koska tahansa näppäimellä
S.RETRIEVER
.
b. Oletusarvo, kun tuloliitännöille USB ja BT AUDIO on
valittu ON.
c. Asetus toimii vain dual mono-koodatuille Dolby
Digital- ja DTS-ääniraidoille.
d. Oletuksena tätä ei näytetä. Joitakin laitteen asetuksia
on muutettava, jotta valikko näkyy (katso: Fixed PCM
-asetusten näyttäminen, sivu 29).
e. Alkuasetus AUTO on käytettävissä vain Dolby
True HD -signaaleille. Valitse MAX tai MID muille
signaaleille kuin Dolby TrueHD.
f. Useimmilla SACD:lla ei pitäisi olla ongelmia, mutta jos
äänessä on säröä, muuta gain-arvoksi 0 dB.
g. Toiminto on käytettävissä vain, jos kytketty näyttö
tulee automaattista audio/video-synkronisointia
HDMI:n kautta. Jos automaattisesti säädetty
viive ei ole sopiva, aseta A.DLY OFF ja säädä
viive manuaalisesti. Kysy näyttölaitteesi
synkronisointiominaisuudesta sen valmistajalta.
h. Käytettävissä vain kaksikanavaiselle äänelle DOLBY
PLII MUSIC -tilassa.
i. Vain kaksikanavaisen lähteen kuuntelulle NEO:6
CINEMA- ja NEO:6 MUSIC -tiloissa.
Asetus/Mitä se tekee Optiot Asetus/Mitä se tekee Optiot
Hyödyllinen ominaisuus, jos huomaat
viiveen, ennen kuin OFF tunnistaa PCM-
signaalin esim. CD:ltä.
Jos valitset ON, voi kuulua häiriöitä ei-PCM-
lähteiden soitossa. Jos tämä on ongelma,
valitse toinen tulosignaali.
Säätää formaatteihin Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
ja DTS-HD Master Audio optimoitujen
elo kuvien ääniraitojen dynaamisen vaihtelu-
välin (saatat tarvita tätä kuunnellessa
surroundääntä hiljaisella volyymilla).
Joissakin Dolby Digital- ja DTS-
äänilähteissä on erittäin matalia
bassoääniä. Säädä matalien
taajuuksien vaimennus siten, että ne
eivät aiheuta säröääntä kaiuttimista.
Matalia taajuuksia ei rajoiteta, kun
asetus on suositusarvo 0 dB. Arvo
-15 dB on jo erittäin huomattava
rajoitus. Kun valittuna on OFF,
LFE-kanavalta ei kuulu ääntä.
Tuo yksityiskohtaisuutta SACD:n soittoon
lisäämällä dynamiikkaa (digitaalisessa
prosessoinnissa).
Määrittelee HDMI-audiosignaalin
reitittämisen tästä vastaanottimesta (AMP)
tai läpiviennin TV:lle (THRU). Kun THRU
on valittu, vastaanotin ei toista ääntä.
Tämä toiminto korjaa automaattisesti
HDMI-kaapeleilla kytkettyjen laitteiden
audio ja videon viiveen. Audion viive
määritellään riippuen HDMI-kaapelilla
kytketyn näyttölaitteen toimintatilasta.
Videon viive määritellään automaattisesti
audion viiveen perusteella.
(Käytettävissä vain keskikaiuttimen kanssa.)
Jakaa keskikanavaa vasemmalle ja oikealle
kaiuttimelle ja saa kanavan kuulostamaan
leveämmältä (isot asetukset) tai kapeammalta
(pienet asetukset).
C.WIDTH’in asetus ”7” voi aiheuttaa sen, että
keskikanavalta ei kuulu ääntä.
0 – 7
Oletus: 3
Säätää surroundäänen painotusta eteen
ja taakse ja saa äänen kuulostamaan
etäisemmältä (arvo -) tai lähempää tulevalta
(arvo +)
-3 – +3
Oletus: 0
Laajentaa stereokuvaa edestä surroundkaiuttimille
ja saa aikaan vaikutelman ympäröivyydestä.
(Käytettävissä vain keskikaiuttimen kanssa.)
Säätää keskiäänen kuvaa ja luo laululle ja
puheelle laajemman stereokuvan. Säädä
arvo väliltä 0 (kaikki keskikanavasta
vasemmalle ja oikealle etukaiuttimelle) – 10
(keskikanava vain keskikaiuttimeen).
0 – 10
Oletus: 3
29
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
5
Kuuntelu laitteistolla
5
Listening to your system
5
5
29
2
35
4
Displaying the Fixed PCM Setting menu
The Fixed PCM Audio options are not displayed by default.
Perform the following operations to display them.
1
Switch the receiver into standby.
2
While holding down
AUTO SURROUND/STREAM
DIRECT
on the front panel, hold
Í
STANDBY/ON
.
The setting switches between display and hide each
time you operate these steps.
Changing the TV format setting of Graphical
User Interface
If the Graphical User Interface screen is not displayed
correctly, it may be that the TV system is set incorrectly for
your country or region.
1
Switch the receiver into standby.
2
While holding down
TUNE
on the front panel, hold
Í
STANDBY/ON
.
Each press switches between
PAL
and
NTSC
.
•
Default: PAL
•
The functions that can be set differ depending on the input signal or speaker settings.
AUTO
SURROUND
DIRECT PURE DIRECT STEREO ALC/
STANDARD
ADV SURR Using the
headphones
Analog
signal
Other
signals
Speaker
Setting
  
Channel
Level

Speaker
Distance
  
Phase
Control

Bass/Treble

Acoustic
Calibration
EQ

Sound Delay

MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS

Advanced
Sound
Retriever

DUAL MONO

Fixed PCM

Dynamic
Range
Control

LFE
Attenuate
  
SACD Gain

HDMI Audio

Auto Delay

Center Image
(
NEO:6 only)
  
Fixed PCM -asetusten näyttäminen
Fixed PCM- audioasetuksia ei oletusarvoisesti näytetä.
Saat ne näkyviin seuraavasti:
1 Aseta vastaanotin valmiustilaan.
2 Pidä painettuna etulevyn
AUTO SURROUND/
STREAM DIRECT
ja pidä painettuna
STANDBY/
ON
.
Joka kerta kun teet tämän, näyttöruudussa vaihtelevat
asetukset näkyvissä ja piilotettuna.
Graasen käyttöliittymän TV-formaatin
asetuksien muuttaminen
Jos graanen käyttöliittymä ei näy TV:ssä kunnolla,
TV:n alueasetus voi olla väärä.
1 Aseta vastaanotin valmiustilaan.
2 Pidä painettuna etulevyn
TUNE
ja pidä
painettuna
STANDBY/ON
.
Jokainen painallus vaihtaa valillä PAL ja NTSC.
• Oletus: PAL.
• Toiminnot, jotka voidaan valita tulosignaalista tai kaiuttimien asetuksista riippuen
Kuulokkeilla
Analoginen
signaali
Muut
signaalit
(vain Neo:6)
Kaiutin-
asetukset
Kanava-
taso
Kaiuttimien
etäisyys
Vaiheen-
säätö
Basso/
Diskantti
Akustisen
kalibraation
EQ
Äänen viive
30
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
6
6
Kotivalikko
6
6
30
2
35
4
Home Menu
Using the Home Menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver, and also
explains how to fine-tune individual speaker system settings
to your liking.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connections for
Home Menu.
•
If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect
them.
•
You can’t use the Home Menu when the USB input is
selected.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Press
Í
RECEIVER
to switch on.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Press
HOME MENU
.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
•
Full Auto MCACC – This is a quick and effective
automatic surround setup (see Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC) on page 16).
•
Manual SP Setup
-
Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
-
X.Over – Specify which frequencies will be sent to the
subwoofer (page 31
).
-
Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 31
).
-
Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 32
).
•
Input Assign – Specify what you’ve connected to the
(CD) audio input (see The Input Assign menu
on page 32).
•
Auto Power Down – Sets to automatically turn off the
power when the receiver has not operated for several
hours (see The Auto Power Down menu
on page 32).
•
HDMI Setup – Set the audio return channel function and
set the HDMI input signal to Standby Through output or
not during standby (see The HDMI Setup menu
on
page 33).
•
DAB Setup – Scan stations and set DAB DRC (page 34).
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize
the surround sound performance. You only need to make
these settings once (unless you change the placement of
your current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to fine-tune your system, but if
you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically
setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 16, it isn’t
necessary to make all of these settings.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size,
number of speakers).
It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC)
on
page 16 are correct.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then
select a speaker size.
Use
/
to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
•
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce
bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to
the subwoofer.
•
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL
to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose
NO (the center channel is sent to the other speakers).
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
VOLUME
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2a.Speaker Setting
Front
Center
Surr
Subwoofer:
Return
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
YES
SMALL
6
6
30
2
35
4
Home Menu
Using the Home Menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver, and also
explains how to fine-tune individual speaker system settings
to your liking.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connections for
Home Menu.
•
If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect
them.
•
You can’t use the Home Menu when the USB input is
selected.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Press
Í
RECEIVER
to switch on.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Press
HOME MENU
.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
•
Full Auto MCACC – This is a quick and effective
automatic surround setup (see Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC) on page 16).
•
Manual SP Setup
-
Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
-
X.Over – Specify which frequencies will be sent to the
subwoofer (page 31
).
-
Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 31
).
-
Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 32
).
•
Input Assign – Specify what you’ve connected to the
(CD) audio input (see The Input Assign menu
on page 32).
•
Auto Power Down – Sets to automatically turn off the
power when the receiver has not operated for several
hours (see The Auto Power Down menu
on page 32).
•
HDMI Setup – Set the audio return channel function and
set the HDMI input signal to Standby Through output or
not during standby (see The HDMI Setup menu
on
page 33).
•
DAB Setup – Scan stations and set DAB DRC (page 34).
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize
the surround sound performance. You only need to make
these settings once (unless you change the placement of
your current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to fine-tune your system, but if
you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically
setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 16, it isn’t
necessary to make all of these settings.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size,
number of speakers).
It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC)
on
page 16 are correct.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then
select a speaker size.
Use
/
to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
•
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce
bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to
the subwoofer.
•
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL
to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose
NO (the center channel is sent to the other speakers).
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUME
VOLUME
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2a.Speaker Setting
Front
Center
Surr
Subwoofer:
Return
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
YES
SMALL
6
6
30
2
35
4
Home Menu
Using the Home Menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver, and also
explains how to fine-tune individual speaker system settings
to your liking.
Important
•
The OSD will not appear if you have connected using the
composite output to your TV. Use HDMI connections for
Home Menu.
•
If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect
them.
•
You can’t use the Home Menu when the USB input is
selected.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Press
Í
RECEIVER
to switch on.
2
Switch the TV input to the input that connects this
receiver to the TV through the corresponding HDMI
cable.
3
Press
HOME MENU
.
The Home Menu appears on your TV. Use
/
/
/
and
ENTER
on the remote control to navigate through
the screens and select menu items. Press
RETURN
to
exit the current menu.
•
Press
HOME MENU
at any time to exit the Home
Menu.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
•
Full Auto MCACC – This is a quick and effective
automatic surround setup (see Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC) on page 16).
•
Manual SP Setup
-
Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
-
X.Over – Specify which frequencies will be sent to the
subwoofer (page 31
).
-
Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 31
).
-
Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 32
).
•
Input Assign – Specify what you’ve connected to the
(CD) audio input (see The Input Assign menu
on page 32).
•
Auto Power Down – Sets to automatically turn off the
power when the receiver has not operated for several
hours (see The Auto Power Down menu
on page 32).
•
HDMI Setup – Set the audio return channel function and
set the HDMI input signal to Standby Through output or
not during standby (see The HDMI Setup menu
on
page 33).
•
DAB Setup – Scan stations and set DAB DRC (page 34).
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize
the surround sound performance. You only need to make
these settings once (unless you change the placement of
your current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to fine-tune your system, but if
you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically
setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 16, it isn’t
necessary to make all of these settings.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size,
number of speakers).
It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC)
on
page 16 are correct.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then
select a speaker size.
Use
/
to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
•
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce
bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to
the subwoofer.
•
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL
to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose
NO (the center channel is sent to the other speakers).
RECEIVERRECEIVER AUDIO SELAUDIO SEL
AV
ADJUST
MUTE
HOME
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURNRETURN
VOLUMEVOLUME
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2a.Speaker Setting
Front
Center
Surr
Subwoofer:
Return
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
YES
SMALL
Kotivalikon käyttäminen
Seuraavassa osiossa on yksityiskohtaisia ohjeita
vastaanottimen käyttämisestä ja kuinka hienovirität
erilaiset kaiuttimien asennukset mieleisiksesi.
Tärkeä
• Näyttövalikko OSD ei näy TV:ssä, jos olet kytkenyt
vastaanottimen televisioon komposiittilähdöstä. Käytä
valikkoa HDMI-kaapelin kautta.
• Irrota kuulokkeet, jos ne ovat kytkettynä.
• Et voi käyttää kotivalikkoa, jos tuloliitäntänä on USB.
1 Kytke virta vastaanottimeen ja televisioon.
Paina virta päälle näppäimellä
RECEIVER
.
2 Valitse TV:n tuloliitännäksi se liitäntä, johon olet
kytkenyt tämän laitteen HDMI-kaapelilla.
3 Paina
HOME MENU
.
Televisioon ilmestyy kotivalikko. Käytä kaukosäätimen
näppäimiä ja
ENTER
valikossa
navigoimiseen ja valintojen tekemiseen. Painamalla
RETURN
poistut edelliseen ruutuun.
• Kotivalikosta voi poistua koska tahansa painamalla
HOME MENU
.
4 Valitse asetus, jota haluat muokata.
• Full Auto MCACC – Nopea ja tehokas, automaattinen
surroundasennus (katso Surroundäänen automaattiset
asetukset (MCACC), sivu 16).
• Manual SP Setup
- Speaker Setting – Määrittele kytkemiesi kaiuttimien
koko ja määrä (katso jäljempänä).
- X.Over – Määrittele taajuudet, jotka toistetaan
alataajuuskaiuttimella (sivu 31).
- Channel Level – Säädä kaiutinjärjestelmäsi
keskinäinen tasapaino (sivu 31).
- Speaker Distance – Määrittele kaiuttimien etäisyys
kuuntelukohdasta (sivu 32).
• Input Assign – Määrittele, mitä olet kytkenyt (CD)
audiotuloon (Audiotulon määrittely, sivu 32).
• Auto Power Down – Sammuttaa virran automaattisesti,
jos vastaanotinta ei ole käytetty useaan tuntiin (katso
Auto Power Down -valikko, sivu 32).
• HDMI Setup – Aseta audion paluukanavan toiminto
sekä määrittele HDMI-tulosignaalille joko läpivienti
valmiustilassa tai ei valmiustilassa ( katso HDMI-
asetusten valikko, sivu 33).
• DAB Setup – Kanavien haku ja DAB DRC (sivu 34).
Manuaaliset kaiuttimien asetukset
Tällä vastaanottimella voit säätää asetukset tarkoin
parasta surroundlaatua varten. Nämä asetukset tarvitsee
tehdä vain kerran, jollet vaihda kaiuttimien paikkoja tai
asenna niitä lisää.
Asetuksilla hienosäädät järjestelmän, mutta niitä ei
tarvita, jos olet tyytyväinen Surroundäänen automaattisilla
asetuksilla (MCACC), sivu 16, saatuihin tuloksiin.
Kaiuttimien asetukset
Määrittele näillä asetuksilla kaiuttimien konguraatio
(koko ja lukumäärä).
Kannattaa tarkistaa, ovatko Surroundäänen
automaattisilla asetuksilla (MCACC), sivu 16, saadut
arvot oikeat.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta Manual SP Setup.
2 Valitse ’Speaker Setting’
3 Valitse säädettävä kaiuttimien ryhmä, sen jälkeen
valitse kaiuttimen koko.
Tee koon ja lukumäärän valinnat näppäimillä
seuraaville kaiuttimille:
• Front – Valitse LARGE, jos etukaiuttimissa on hyvä
bassotoisto tai jos alataajuuskaiutinta ei ole kytketty.
Valitse SMALL, jolloin bassotaajuudet lähetetään
alataajuuskaiuttimeen.
• Center - Valitse LARGE, jos keskikaiuttimessa on hyvä
bassotoisto tai valitse SMALL, jolloin bassotaajuudet
lähetetään muihin kaiuttimiin tai alataajuuskaiuttimeen.
Jos keskikaiutinta ei ole, valitse NO ja keskikanava
lähetetään muihin kaiuttimiin.
31
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
6
6
Kotivalikko
Home Menu
6
6
31
2
35
4
•
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers
choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to
the other speakers).
•
Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer
when YES is selected (see notes below). Choose the
PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass
frequencies that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you
did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
•
If you select SMALL for the front speakers, the subwoofer
will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center,
surround can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are
set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent
to the subwoofer.
•
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem
logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best
bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the
amount of bass due to low frequency cancellations. In this
case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If
you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to
LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge
which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest
option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
X.Over
•
Default setting: 100Hz
This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing
back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those
selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be
for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
•
For more on selecting the speaker sizes, see Speaker
Setting on page 30.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘X.Over’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
3
Choose the frequency cutoff point.
Frequencies below the cutoff point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall
balance of your speaker system, an important factor when
setting up a home theater system.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Channel Level settings are
output at high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Select a setup option.
•
Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
•
Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
4
Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press
ENTER
. After
the volume increases to the reference level, test tones
will be output.
5
Adjust the level of each channel using
/
.
If you selected Manual, use
/
to switch speakers.
The Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.
Note
•
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take
the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
reading).
•
The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You
may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.
6
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Channel Level menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2b.X.Over
Return
Frequency 100Hz
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone Manual
Enter:Next Return
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone [ Manual ]
Please Wait . . .20
Caution
Loud test tones
will be output.
Return
2c.Channel Level
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
0dB
Home Menu
6
6
31
2
35
4
•
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers
choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to
the other speakers).
•
Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer
when YES is selected (see notes below). Choose the
PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass
frequencies that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you
did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
•
If you select SMALL for the front speakers, the subwoofer
will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center,
surround can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are
set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent
to the subwoofer.
•
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem
logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best
bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the
amount of bass due to low frequency cancellations. In this
case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If
you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to
LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge
which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest
option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
X.Over
•
Default setting: 100Hz
This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing
back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those
selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be
for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
•
For more on selecting the speaker sizes, see Speaker
Setting on page 30.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘X.Over’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
3
Choose the frequency cutoff point.
Frequencies below the cutoff point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall
balance of your speaker system, an important factor when
setting up a home theater system.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Channel Level settings are
output at high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Select a setup option.
•
Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
•
Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
4
Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press
ENTER
. After
the volume increases to the reference level, test tones
will be output.
5
Adjust the level of each channel using
/
.
If you selected Manual, use
/
to switch speakers.
The Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.
Note
•
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take
the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
reading).
•
The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You
may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.
6
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Channel Level menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2b.X.Over
Return
Frequency 100Hz
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone Manual
Enter:Next Return
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone [ Manual ]
Please Wait . . .20
Caution
Loud test tones
will be output.
Return
2c.Channel Level
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
0dB
Home Menu
6
6
31
2
35
4
•
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers
choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to
the other speakers).
•
Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer
when YES is selected (see notes below). Choose the
PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass
frequencies that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you
did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
•
If you select SMALL for the front speakers, the subwoofer
will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center,
surround can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are
set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent
to the subwoofer.
•
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem
logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best
bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the
amount of bass due to low frequency cancellations. In this
case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If
you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to
LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge
which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest
option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
X.Over
•
Default setting: 100Hz
This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing
back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those
selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be
for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
•
For more on selecting the speaker sizes, see Speaker
Setting on page 30.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘X.Over’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
3
Choose the frequency cutoff point.
Frequencies below the cutoff point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall
balance of your speaker system, an important factor when
setting up a home theater system.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Channel Level settings are
output at high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Select a setup option.
•
Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
•
Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
4
Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press
ENTER
. After
the volume increases to the reference level, test tones
will be output.
5
Adjust the level of each channel using
/
.
If you selected Manual, use
/
to switch speakers.
The Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.
Note
•
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take
the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
reading).
•
The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You
may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.
6
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Channel Level menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2b.X.Over
Return
Frequency 100Hz
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone Manual
Enter:Next Return
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone [ Manual ]
Please Wait . . .20
Caution
Loud test tones
will be output.
Return
2c.Channel Level
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
0dB
Home Menu
6
6
31
2
35
4
•
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers
choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to
the other speakers).
•
Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer
when YES is selected (see notes below). Choose the
PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass
frequencies that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you
did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
•
If you select SMALL for the front speakers, the subwoofer
will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center,
surround can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are
set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent
to the subwoofer.
•
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem
logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best
bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the
amount of bass due to low frequency cancellations. In this
case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If
you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to
LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge
which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest
option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
X.Over
•
Default setting: 100Hz
This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing
back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those
selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be
for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
•
For more on selecting the speaker sizes, see Speaker
Setting on page 30.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘X.Over’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
3
Choose the frequency cutoff point.
Frequencies below the cutoff point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall
balance of your speaker system, an important factor when
setting up a home theater system.
CAUTION
•
The test tones used in the Channel Level settings are
output at high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Select a setup option.
•
Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
•
Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
4
Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press
ENTER
. After
the volume increases to the reference level, test tones
will be output.
5
Adjust the level of each channel using
/
.
If you selected Manual, use
/
to switch speakers.
The Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.
Note
•
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take
the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
reading).
•
The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You
may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.
6
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Channel Level menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2b.X.Over
Return
Frequency 100Hz
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone Manual
Enter:Next Return
2c.Channel Level
Test Tone [ Manual ]
Please Wait . . .20
Caution
Loud test tones
will be output.
Return
2c.Channel Level
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
[ 0dB]
0dB
• Surr – Valitse LARGE, jos surroundkaiuttimissa on
hyvä bassotoisto. Valitse SMALL, jolloin bassotaajuudet
lähetetään muille kaiuttimille tai alataajuuskaiuttimelle.
Jos surroundkaiuttimia ei ole, valitse NO, jolloin
surroundkanava lähetetään muille kaiuttimille.
• Subwoofer – Alataajuuskaiutin toistaa LFE-signaalit
ja bassotaajuudet, jos sen tila on YES ja kanavien
bassoasetukset ovat SMALL (katso huomio jäljempää).
Valitse PLUS, jos haluat alataajuuskaiuttimen toistavan
bassoa jatkuvasti tai haluat tuhdimman basson (etu- ja
keskikaiuttimien normaalisti toistamat bassot ohjataan
alataajuuskaiuttimelle). Jos alataajuuskaiutinta ei
ole, valitse NO ja bassotaajuudet toistetaan muista
kaiuttimista.
4 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
Palaat Manual SP Setup -valikkoon.
Huomio
• Jos etukaiuttimille valitaan SMALL, alataajuuskaiutin
on kiinteästi YES. Keski- ja surroundkaiuttimille ei voi
valita LARGE, jos etukaiuttimilla on SMALL. Silloin
bassotaajuudet lähetetään alataajuuskaiuttimelle.
• Jos sinulla on alataajuuskaiutin ja haluat reilusti bassoa,
loogiselta valinnalta tuntuisi LARGE etukaiuttimille
ja PLUS alataajuuskaiuttimelle. Tämä ei kuitenkaan
anna parasta bassotoistoa. Matalien taajuuksien
kumoutuminen huoneessa voi kaiuttimien asettelusta
riippuen johtaa huonompaan bassotoistoon. Tällöin
kokeile muuttaa kaiuttimien sijaintia tai kulmaa. Jos
hyviä tuloksia ei tule, kokeile alataajuuskaiuttimelle
PLUS tai YES ja etukaiuttimille LARGE tai SMALL
yhdistelminä ja hae paras tulos kuuntelemalla.
Ongelmatilanteessa helpoin ratkaisu on kaiken
bassotoiston reitittäminen alataajuuskaiuttimeen
valitsemalla etukaiuttimille SMALL.
X.Over
• Oletus: 100 Hz
Tämä asetus määrittelee rajataajuuden kaiutinasetuksessa
LARGE kaiuttimien ja alataajuuskaiuttimen toiston välillä
sekä bassotoiston kaiuttimista, jos asetus on SMALL.
Se määrää myös LFE-kanavan bassoäänien rajan.
• Katso lisää kaiuttimien koon määrittelystä, sivu 30.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’Manual SP Setup’.
2 Valitse Manual SP Setup-valikosta ’X.Over’.
3 Valitse rajataajuus.
Rajataajuutta pienemmät raajuudet lähetetään
alataajuuskaiuttimelle (tai LARGE kaiuttimille).
4 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
.
Palaat Manual SP Setup -valikkoon.
Kanavataso
Kanavatasoasetuksilla voit säätää kaiutinjärjestelmäsi
kokonaistasapainon. Tämä on tärkeä kotiteatterin
asentamisen vaihe.
VAROITUS
• Kanavatason asetuksen testiäänet ovat erittäin
voimakkaita.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’Manual SP Setup’.
2 Valitse Manual SP Setup-valikosta ’Channel
Level’.
3 Valitse asetustapa
• Manual – Vaihda testiääni kaiuttimesta toiseen
manuaalisesti ja säädä kanavatasot yksitellen.
• Auto – Säädä kanavatasot testiäänen siirtyessä
kaiuttimesta toiseen automaattisesti.
4 Vahvista valitsemasi asetustapa.
Testiäänet käynnistyvät kun painat
ENTER
. Testiäänet
toistetaan, kun volyymi nousee referenssitasolle.
5 Säädä joka kanavan taso näppäimillä
Jos olet valinnut Manual, vaihda kaiuttimia
näppäimillä .
Auto toistaa testiäänet kaiuttimista ruudussa
näkyvässä järjestyksessä:
Säädä kunkin kaiuttimen tasoa testiäänen kuuluessa.
Huomio
• Jos käytät äänenpaineen (SPL) mittaria, mittaa lukemat
kuuntelukohdasta säädä kunkin kaiuttimen tasoksi
75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• Alataajuuskaiuttimen testiääni toistetaan hiljaiselle
volyymilla. Tasoa voi joutua muuttamaan
koekuuntelussa ääniraidan kanssa.
6 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
Palaat Channel Level -valikkoon.
32
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
6
6
Kotivalikko
Home Menu
6
6
32
2
35
4
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth from your system, you need to specify
the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective
surround sound.
•
For the assignment of the digital signal inputs, see
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 m
increments.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
The Input Assign menu
(CD) audio input terminal is assigned to CD under factory
settings, but this can be changed to TV input.
1
Select ‘Input Assign’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Analog Input’ from the Input Assign menu.
3
Select the desired input option for the (CD) audio input
terminal.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Input Assign menu.
The Auto Power Down menu
Set to automatically turn off the receiver after a specified time
has passed (when the power has been on with no operation
for several hours).
•
Default setting: 6H
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Home Menu.
2
Specify the amount of time to allow before the power is
turned off (when there has been no operation).
•
You can select 2, 4 or 6 hours, or OFF (if no automatic
shutoff is desired).
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2d.Speaker Distance
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
3.0 m
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
3.Input Assign
Return
a.Analog Input
3a.Analog Input
Return
Analog
CD
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
4.Auto Power Down
Return
6H
Auto Power Down
Home Menu
6
6
32
2
35
4
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth from your system, you need to specify
the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective
surround sound.
•
For the assignment of the digital signal inputs, see
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 m
increments.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
The Input Assign menu
(CD) audio input terminal is assigned to CD under factory
settings, but this can be changed to TV input.
1
Select ‘Input Assign’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Analog Input’ from the Input Assign menu.
3
Select the desired input option for the (CD) audio input
terminal.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Input Assign menu.
The Auto Power Down menu
Set to automatically turn off the receiver after a specified time
has passed (when the power has been on with no operation
for several hours).
•
Default setting: 6H
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Home Menu.
2
Specify the amount of time to allow before the power is
turned off (when there has been no operation).
•
You can select 2, 4 or 6 hours, or OFF (if no automatic
shutoff is desired).
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2d.Speaker Distance
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
3.0 m
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
3.Input Assign
Return
a.Analog Input
3a.Analog Input
Return
Analog
CD
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
4.Auto Power Down
Return
6H
Auto Power Down
Home Menu
6
6
32
2
35
4
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth from your system, you need to specify
the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective
surround sound.
•
For the assignment of the digital signal inputs, see
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 m
increments.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
The Input Assign menu
(CD) audio input terminal is assigned to CD under factory
settings, but this can be changed to TV input.
1
Select ‘Input Assign’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Analog Input’ from the Input Assign menu.
3
Select the desired input option for the (CD) audio input
terminal.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Input Assign menu.
The Auto Power Down menu
Set to automatically turn off the receiver after a specified time
has passed (when the power has been on with no operation
for several hours).
•
Default setting: 6H
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Home Menu.
2
Specify the amount of time to allow before the power is
turned off (when there has been no operation).
•
You can select 2, 4 or 6 hours, or OFF (if no automatic
shutoff is desired).
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2d.Speaker Distance
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
3.0 m
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
3.Input Assign
Return
a.Analog Input
3a.Analog Input
Return
Analog
CD
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
4.Auto Power Down
Return
6H
Auto Power Down
Home Menu
6
6
32
2
35
4
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth from your system, you need to specify
the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective
surround sound.
•
For the assignment of the digital signal inputs, see
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 m
increments.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
The Input Assign menu
(CD) audio input terminal is assigned to CD under factory
settings, but this can be changed to TV input.
1
Select ‘Input Assign’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Analog Input’ from the Input Assign menu.
3
Select the desired input option for the (CD) audio input
terminal.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Input Assign menu.
The Auto Power Down menu
Set to automatically turn off the receiver after a specified time
has passed (when the power has been on with no operation
for several hours).
•
Default setting: 6H
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Home Menu.
2
Specify the amount of time to allow before the power is
turned off (when there has been no operation).
•
You can select 2, 4 or 6 hours, or OFF (if no automatic
shutoff is desired).
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2d.Speaker Distance
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
3.0 m
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
3.Input Assign
Return
a.Analog Input
3a.Analog Input
Return
Analog
CD
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
4.Auto Power Down
Return
6H
Auto Power Down
Home Menu
6
6
32
2
35
4
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth from your system, you need to specify
the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective
surround sound.
•
For the assignment of the digital signal inputs, see
Selecting the audio input signal
on page 18.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
3
Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 m
increments.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
The Input Assign menu
(CD) audio input terminal is assigned to CD under factory
settings, but this can be changed to TV input.
1
Select ‘Input Assign’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Analog Input’ from the Input Assign menu.
3
Select the desired input option for the (CD) audio input
terminal.
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Input Assign menu.
The Auto Power Down menu
Set to automatically turn off the receiver after a specified time
has passed (when the power has been on with no operation
for several hours).
•
Default setting: 6H
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Home Menu.
2
Specify the amount of time to allow before the power is
turned off (when there has been no operation).
•
You can select 2, 4 or 6 hours, or OFF (if no automatic
shutoff is desired).
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
2.Manual SP Setup
Return
a.Speaker Setting
b.X.Over
c.Channel Level
d.Speaker Distance
2d.Speaker Distance
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround L
Subwoofer
Return
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
[ 3.0 m ]
3.0 m
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
3.Input Assign
Return
a.Analog Input
3a.Analog Input
Return
Analog
CD
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
4.Auto Power Down
Return
6H
Auto Power Down
Kaiuttimien etäisyys
Saat hyvän syvyysvaikutelman järjestelmästäsi, kun
kaiuttimien etäisyys kuuntelukohdasta on määritelty.
Silloin vastaanotin voi säätää viiveet tehokasta
surroundääntä varten.
• Katso digitaalisen tulosignaalin määrittely, sivu 18:
Audion tulosignaalin valitseminen.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’Manual SP Setup’
2 Valitse Manual SP Setup’ista ’Speaker Distance’.
3 Säädä etäisyys kullekin kaiuttimellä näppäimillä
.
Etäisyyttä voi säätää 0,1 m askelissa.
4 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
.
Palaat Manual SP Setup-valikkoon.
Tuloliitännän määrittelyvalikko
(CD)audion tuloliitäntä on tehdasasetuksena määritelty
CD:lle, mutta se voidaan muuttaa TV:n tuloliitännäksi.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’Input Assign’
2 Valitse Input Assign-valikosta ’Analog Input’
3 Valitse (CD)audion tuloliitännälle haluamasi
vaihtoehto.
4 Kun olet valmis, paina RETURN
Palaat Input Assign -valikkoon.
Auto Power Down -valikko
Sammuttaa automaattisesti virran vastaanottimesta
määritellyn ajan kuluttua (kun virta on päällä, eikä mitään
käyttöä ole ollut)
• Oletus: 6 h
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’Auto Power Down’
2 Määrittele haluamasi aika virran sammuttamiselle
(jos mitään käyttöä ei ole ollut).
• Valittavissa on 2, 4 tai 6 tuntia tai OFF (jos et halua
automaattista sammuttamista).
3 Kun olet valmis, paina RETURN
Palaat kotivalikkoon.
33
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
6
Kotivalikko
6
Home Menu
6
6
33
2
35
4
The HDMI Setup menu
If your TV supports an audio return channel (ARC) function,
connect your TV and this unit with an HDMI cable and the TV
audio will be inputted into this unit via the HDMI terminal
without the need for an audio cable to be connected.
It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI connected
player to the TV even when this receiver’s power is on
standby.
Important
•
Use a High Speed HDMI
®/
™ Cable when using the ARC
function. The ARC function may not operate properly with
other HDMI cables.
1
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Choose the ‘ARC’ setting you want.
When a TV supporting the HDMI Audio Return Channel
function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the
TV can be input via the HDMI terminal.
•
ON – The TV’s sound is input via the HDMI terminal.
•
OFF – The TV’s sound is input from the audio input
terminals other than HDMI inputs.
3
Choose the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.
When the receiver is in standby, the HDMI input signal
selected here will be output to the TV by HDMI.
•
LAST – The HDMI input signal selected previously
will be output.
•
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STRM BOX, GAME – The HDMI
input signal selected here will be output.
•
OFF – Signal will not be output during standby.
-
If the Standby Through setting is not set to OFF,
the power consumption during standby will
increase.
4
Choose the ‘4k60p Setting’ setting you want.
If the TV to be connected using HDMI supports 4K/60p,
you can switch the 4k60p setting in accordance with TV
performance.
1. Select an input terminal that you wish to change
settings using
/
.
2. Use
/
to select ‘4k60p’.
3. Use
/
to select the signal to set.
•
4:4:4 – Select this setting when connecting to a 4K/
60p 4:4:4 24 bit compatible TV using HDMI. More high
quality video images can be enjoyed.
-
When the HDMI cable does not support 4K/60p
4:4:4 24 bit (18 Gbps transmission), video image
may not be output properly.
In that case, select 4:2:0 to watch a 4K/60p 4:2:0 24
bit video image.
•
4:2:0 – Select this setting when connecting to a 4K/
60p 4:2:0 24 bit compatible TV using HDMI.
4. Press
RETURN
.
If certain source devices that do not support 4K/60p
4:4:4 24 bit are used and the HDMI terminal is set to
4:4:4, video output from the source device may turn red,
no audio may be output by the source device, or a 3D
signal may not be output by some of the devices. In
these cases, set the HDMI terminal to 4:2:0.
5
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
Before starting ARC operation
When starting ARC operation, put the TV and this unit in
STANDBY mode after connecting this unit with the TV. Next,
turn ON the power of this unit and then the TV, in this order.
In order to start ARC operation, after connecting this unit to
a TV with an HDMI cable, you will need to switch the input on
the TV to the input mode required to connect to this unit.
Then, you can select a TV program.
Important
•
The ARC function may not operate even if the above
conditions are met. If this is the case, listen to the TV audio
after connecting this unit and the TV with an audio cable.
•
The CEC (Consumer Electronic Control) function may
activate when the ARC function is turned ON, causing
power to turn ON and OFF and the input to switch from
one to another. Since this unit does not guarantee
synchronized operation based on the CEC function, we
recommend that you turn OFF the HDMI CONTROL
setting on the connected player. This unit may not operate
properly if the HDMI CONTROL on the player is ON. Refer
to the relevant device’s instruction manual for details. If
this does not work, turn OFF the ARC function.
If this is the case, listen to the TV audio after connecting
this unit and the TV with an audio cable.
In addition, this unit does not guarantee synchronized
operation that allows the TV remote control to operate the
volume (including mute). Use this unit to operate the
volume (including mute).
•
Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord from the
wall socket when connecting other devices or making
connection changes to this unit. After all connections are
completed, insert the power cord into the wall socket.
•
If the power cord is connected when the ARC function is
ON, the HDMI will take 2 to 10 seconds to initialize. This
unit cannot be operated during the initialization. During
initialization, the HDMI indicator on the display will blink.
Turn ON the unit after blinking stops.
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
6.DAB Setup
Return
5.HDMI Setup
Return
a.ARC
b.Standby Through
c.4k60p Setting
OFF
[
OFF
]
HDMI-asetuksien valikko
Jos TV:si tukee audion paluukanavaa (ARC), kytke TV ja
vastaanotin HDMI-kaapelilla, jolloin TV:n ääni siiretään
vastaanottimelle HDMI-liitännän kautta ilman erillisiä
audiojohtoja.
HDMI:llä kytketyn laitteen signaalit voidaan välittää TV:lle,
vaikka vastaanotin olisi valmiustilassa.
Tärkeä
• ARC-toiminto vaatii High Speed HDMI-kaapelin käyttöä.
Tavallisella HDMI-kaapelilla ARC-toiminto ei välttämättä
toimi.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta HDMI Setup.
2 Valitse haluamasi asetus ’ARC’
Kun vastaanottimeen on kytketty HDMI ARC
-toimintoa tukeva TV, sen ääni voidaan siirtää HDMI-
liitännän kautta.
• ON – TV:n ääni tulee HDMI-liitännän kautta.
• OFF – TV:n ääni tulee muun audion tuloliitännän
kuin HDMI:n kautta.
3 Valitse haluamasi’Standby Through’ -asetus.
Kun vastaanotin on valmiustilassa, näin valittu
signaali välitetään sen tuloliittännästä TV:lle HDMI:n
kautta.
• LAST – Viimeksi valitttu HDMI-signaali lähetetään
• BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STRM BOX, GAME – Näistä
valittu HDMI-tulosignaali välitetään
• OFF – Signaalia ei välitetä valmiustilan aikana.
- Jos Standby Through on muu kuin OFF,
virrankulutus lisääntyy valmiustilan aikana.
4 Valitse haluamasi ’4k60p’-asetus
Jos HDMI:llä kytketty TV tukee 4K60p, voit vaihtaa
4K60p-asetuksen TV.n suorituskyvyn mukaiseksi.
1. Valitse näppäimillä tuloliitäntä, jonka asetuksia
haluat vaihtaa.
2. Valitse näppäimillä ’4k60p’.
3. Valitse näppäimillä asetettava signaali.
• 4:4:4 – Valitse tämä asetus, kun kytkeydyt HDMI:llä
televisioon, joka tukee 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit. Nauti
paremmasta kuvanlaadusta.
- Jos HDMI-kaapeli ei tue 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit
(18 Gbps transmissio), videokuva ei ehkä näy
kunnolla. Sellaisessa tapauksessa valitse 4:2:0 ja
katso videokuvaa 4K/60 p 4:2:0 24 bit.
• 4:2:0 – Valitse tämä asetus, kun kytkeydyt HDMI:llä
televisioon, joka tukee 4K/60p 4:2:0 24 bit.
4. Paina
RETURN
.
Jos käytetään tiettyjä lähdelaitteita, jotka eivät tue
4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit ja HDMI-liitännän asetus on 4:4:4,
lähdelaitteesta tuleva videokuva voi olla punainen
tai ääntä ei kuulu tai joistakin laitteista ei lähde
3D-signaalia. Tällaisissa tapauksissa HDMI-liitännän
asetuksen tulee olla 4:2:0.
5 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
Palaat kotivalikkoon.
Ennen ARC:n käytön aloittamista
Aseta TV ja tämä vastaanotin ennen ARC:n käytön
aloittamista valmiustilaan niiden HDMI-kaapelilla
kytkemisen jälkeen. Seuraavaksi laita virta päälle
vastaanottimeen ja sitten televisioon, tässä
järjestyksessä. Voit käyttää ARC:ia kun valitset television
tuloliitännäksi sen liitännän, johon olet kytkenyt
vastaanottimen.
Tärkeä
• ARC-toiminto ei ehkä toimi, jos ei ole menetelty
yllä kuvatulla tavalla. Kuuntele tällöin TV:n audiota
kytkemällä TV vastaanottimeen audiojohdolla.
• CEC-toiminto (Consumer Electronic Control) saattaa
aktivoitua kun ARC-toiminto on päällä, jolloin virta
menee päälle ja pois ja tuloliitäntä vaihtuu. Koska
tämän laitteen CEC-toimintoon perustuva synkronisoitu
toiminta ei ole taattu, suosittelemme kytketyn soittimen
HDMI Control’in kytkemistä tilaan OFF. Vastaanotin ei
ehkä toimi oikein, jos soittimen HDMI Control on ON.
Katso tarvittaessa toisen laitten ohjeista lisää. Jos
ratkaisua ei löydy, vaihda ARC:n tilaksi OFF. Kuuntele
tällöin TV:n audiota kytkemällä TV vastaanottimeen
audiojohdolla.
Tämä laite ei myöskään tue synkronisoitua toimintoa,
jossa TV:n kaukosäädin ohjaa volyymia ja mykistystä.
Säädä volyymi ja mykistys tällä laitteella.
• Sammuta virta ja irrota verkkojohto seinäkoskettimesta
kytkiessäsi muita laitteita tai vaihtaessa kytkentöjä
vastaanottimeen. Aseta virtajohto seinäkoskettimeen
vasta kun kytkennät ovat valmiit.
• Jos virtajohto kytketään ja ARC-toiminto on päällä,
HDMI:n alustus kestää 2-10 sekuntia. Tänä aikana
laitetta ei voi käyttää. Alustuksen aikana näyttöruudun
HDMI-merkkivalo vilkkuu. Kytke virta kokonaan päälle
kun vilkkuminen loppuu.
34
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
6
Kotivalikko
6
Home Menu
6
6
34
2
35
4
The DAB Setup menu
Scan stations newly or make the DRC setting.
DAB Scan
You can run the auto scan when new DAB stations are
added or when you move house.
1
Select “DAB Setup” from the Home Menu.
2
Select “DAB SCAN” from the DAB Setup menu.
Scanning will start after you press
ENTER
. After the
scanning process is complete, “COMPLETE” appears
on the display.
To finish the operation, make sure “OK” is selected, then
press
ENTER
. If you try scanning again, select RETRY
using
/
, and press
ENTER
.
•
If no station can be found, “NO STATION” will appear.
To finish the operation, make sure “OK” is selected,
then press
ENTER
. If you scan again, select RETRY
using
/
, and press
ENTER
.
•
To stop the scan operation before it is complete, press
RETURN
.
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
DAB DRC
With the DRC (Dynamic Range Control) setting, you can
reduce the dynamic range of DAB digital radio so that you
can still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels - ideal for listening to the radio late at night when you
don't want to disturb anyone.
•
Default: 0
1
Select “DAB Setup” from the Home Menu.
2
Select “DAB DRC” from the DAB Setup menu.
3
Select the level that you want to set.
You can select 0 (DRC off), 1 (large reduction) or 1/2
(small reduction).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
6. DAB Setup
Return
a. DAB SCAN
b. DAB DRC
[
START
]
[
0
]
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
6. DAB Setup
Return
a. DAB SCAN
b. DAB DRC 0
[
START
]
Home Menu
6
6
34
2
35
4
The DAB Setup menu
Scan stations newly or make the DRC setting.
DAB Scan
You can run the auto scan when new DAB stations are
added or when you move house.
1
Select “DAB Setup” from the Home Menu.
2
Select “DAB SCAN” from the DAB Setup menu.
Scanning will start after you press
ENTER
. After the
scanning process is complete, “COMPLETE” appears
on the display.
To finish the operation, make sure “OK” is selected, then
press
ENTER
. If you try scanning again, select RETRY
using
/
, and press
ENTER
.
•
If no station can be found, “NO STATION” will appear.
To finish the operation, make sure “OK” is selected,
then press
ENTER
. If you scan again, select RETRY
using
/
, and press
ENTER
.
•
To stop the scan operation before it is complete, press
RETURN
.
3
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
DAB DRC
With the DRC (Dynamic Range Control) setting, you can
reduce the dynamic range of DAB digital radio so that you
can still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels - ideal for listening to the radio late at night when you
don't want to disturb anyone.
•
Default: 0
1
Select “DAB Setup” from the Home Menu.
2
Select “DAB DRC” from the DAB Setup menu.
3
Select the level that you want to set.
You can select 0 (DRC off), 1 (large reduction) or 1/2
(small reduction).
4
When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You return to the Home Menu.
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
6. DAB Setup
Return
a. DAB SCAN
b. DAB DRC
[
START
]
[
0
]
Home Menu
1.Full Auto MCACC
2.Manual SP Setup
3.Input Assign
4.Auto Power Down
5.HDMI Setup
Return
6.DAB Setup
6. DAB Setup
Return
a. DAB SCAN
b. DAB DRC 0
[
START
]
DAB-asetuksien valikko
Hae uusia kanavia tai säädä DRC-asetusta.
DAB-haku
Voit tehdä automaattisen haun uusien DAB-kanavien
lisäämiseksi tai kun olet muuttanut.
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’DAB Setup’
2 Valitse DAB Setupista ’DAB SCAN’
Haku alkaa, kun painat
ENTER
. Kun haku on valmis,
näyttöruudussa on ’COMPLETE’.
Varmista toimenpiteen lopuksi, että valitset ’OK’
ja paina
ENTER
. Jos haluat uuden haun, valitse
näppäimillä RETRY ja paina
ENTER
.
• Jos kanavia ei löydy, näyttöruudussa on ’NO
STATION’. Toimenpiteen lopuksi, valitse ’OK’ ja
paina
ENTER
. Jos haet vielä, valitse näppäimillä
RETRY ja paina
ENTER
.
• Voit keskeyttää haun ennen sen valmistumista
painamalla
RETURN
.
3 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
.
Palaat kotivalikkoon.
DAB DRC
DRC:llä (Dynamic Range Control) voit kaventaa
digitaalisen DAB-radion dynaamista vaihtelua, jotta kuulet
hiljaisetkin jaksot pienellä volyymillä – tämä sopii radion
kuunteluun yöllä muita häiritsemättä.
• Oletus: 0
1 Valitse kotivalikosta ’DAB Setup’.
2 Valitse DAB Setup-valikosta ’DAB DRC’.
3 Valitse haluamasi arvo
0 – DRC ei päällä,
1 – runsas kavennus tai
½ - pieni kavennus
4 Kun olet valmis, paina
RETURN
.
Palaat kotivalikkoon.
35
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
Lisätietoa
7
Vianhaku
Vääränlainen käyttö tulkitaan usein ongelmiksi ja
vioiksi. Mikäli luulet laitteessa olevan jotain vikaa,
tutki seuraavat kohdat. Katsasta myös muut käyttöön
liittyvät komponentit ja sähkölaitteet, koska ongelma
voi johtua niistä. Jos ongelmat eivät ratkea seuraavien
toimenpiteiden avulla, ota yhteyttä lähimpään Pioneerin
huoltoliikkeeseen laitteen korjaamiseksi.
• Jos laite ei toimi oikein ulkoisista vaikutuksista,
kuten staattisesta sähköstä johtuen, irrota
virtakosketin seinästä ja kytke se takaisin normaalien
käyttöolosuhteiden palauttamiseksi.
Yleistä
❖ Virta ei mene päälle.
→ Irrota virtajohto seinästä ja aseta se uudestaan
paikalleen.
❖ Vastaanotin sammuu äkillisesti.
→ Jos käytössä on Auto Power Down -toiminto, virta
sammutetaan automaattisesti kun laitetta ei ole
käytetty useaan tuntiin. Auto Power Down’in asetukset
voit tarkistaa: katso sivu 32, Auto Power Down
-valikko.
→ Varmista, etteivät johtimien säikeet kaiutinjohdon
päässä kosketa vastaanottimen takalevyä. Tämä
saattaa sammuttaa virran automaattisesti.
→ Minuutin kuluttua sammumisesta (tänä aikana
vastaanotinta ei voi käynnistää) kytke virta uudelleen
päälle. Jos ongelma jatkuu, ota yhteyttä Pioneerin
huoltoliikkeeseen.
→ Jos soitettavassa äänilähteessä on vain hyvin vähän
matalia taajuuksia, vaihda asetuksiksi Front: SMALL /
Subwoofer: YES tai Front LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS
(Sivu 30).
❖ HDMI-merkkivalo vilkkuu ja virta ei mene päälle
→ Vastaanottimessa voi olla vakava vika. Älä kytke
virtaa päälle. Irrota virtajohto ja ota yhteyttä Pioneerin
huoltoliikkeeseen.
❖ Vastaanottimen tuloliitäntä vaihtuu toiseksi (Kun
ARC-toiminto on päällä)
→ CEC-toiminto (Consumer Electronic Control) voi
aktivoitua kun ARC on päällä ja aiheuttaa tuloliitännän
vaihtumisen. Tämä laite ei takaa CEC-toimintoon
perustuvaa synkronisoitua toimivuutta, joten aseta
kytketyn soittimen HDMI CONTROL tilaan OFF. Katso
ohjeita soittimen ohjekirjasta.
Jos tämä ei auta, vaihda ARC-toiminto OFF.
Tällaisessa tapauksessa kuuntele TV:n ääntä
audiokaapelikytkennän kautta.
❖ Näyttöruudussa on OVERHEAT ja virta sammuu.
→ Lämpötila laitteen sisällä on ylittänyt sallitun rajan.
Siirrä laite paremmin ilmastoituun kohtaan.
→ Alenna äänenvoimakkuuden tasoa.
❖ Näyttöruudussa on TEMP ja äänenvoimakkuus
heikkenee.
→ Lämpötila laitteen sisällä on ylittänyt sallitun rajan.
Siirrä laite paremmin ilmastoituun kohtaan.
→ Alenna äänenvoimakkuuden tasoa.
❖ Ääntä ei kuulu kun tulotoiminto valitaan.
→ Lisää voimakkuutta näppäimillä
VOLUME+/-
.
→ Paina kaukosäätimen
MUTE
, jos mykistys oli päällä.
→ Aseta tehtyjen kytkentöjen mukaisesti (sivu 18)
AUDIO SEL
joko H (HDMI), C1/O1 (digitaalinen) tai A
(analoginen).
→ Varmista, että kytkennät on tehty oikein (katso
Laitteiden kytkeminen, sivu 8).
→ Tarkista äänilähteenä toimivan laitteen audio-
asetukset.
→ Tukeudu äänilähteenä toimivan laitteen
käyttöoppaaseen.
❖ Kuvaa ei näy, kun input-toiminto on valittu.
→ Varmista, että kytkennät on tehty oikein
(katso Laitteiden kytkeminen, sivu 8).
→ Käytä lähdelaitteen ja TV:n kytkemiseen saman-
tyyppisiä videokaapeleita (katso Videolähtöjen
kytkeminen, sivu 11).
→ TV:lle valittu tuloliitäntä ei ole oikea. Katso lisätietoja
TV:n ohjekirjasta.
❖ Alataajuskaiuttimesta ei kuulu ääntä
→ Varmista, että kaiuttimessa on virta päällä.
→ Joa kaiuttimessa on voimakkuuden säädin, varmista,
että se on auki.
→ Kuuntelemassasi Dolby Digital- tai DTS-lähteessä ei
ole matalaa LFE-kanavaa.
→ Aseta alataajuskaiuttimen asetukseksi kohdassa
Kaiuttimen asetukset (sivu 30) YES tai PLUS.
→ Vaihda LFE ATT (matalien äänien vaimennus, sivu 28)
tilaan LFEATT 0 tai LFEATT 5.
❖ Surround- tai keskikaiuttimesta ei kuulu ääntä.
→ Kytke kaiuttimet oikein (sivu 9).
→ Katso asetukset kohdasta: Kaiuttimien asetukset
(sivu 30).
→ Katso voimakkuus kohdasta: Kanavatasot (sivu 31).
❖ Jostakin kaiuttimesta ei kuulu ääntä.
→ Varmista, että kaiuttimen johto on kytketty
asianmukaisesti (liitäntä on oikea, kaiutinjohto on
jämäkästi paikallaan, mikään johdon paljas osa ei
kosketa takalevyä).
❖ Phase Controlilla ei tunnu olevan vaikutusta.
→ Mikäli alataajuuskaiuttimessa on alapäästösuodatin,
sen tulee olla pois käytöstä tai sen ylärajan
on oltava korkeimmassa taajuudessa. Jos
alataajuuskaiuttimessa on PHASE-asetus, aseta
arvoksi 0° (tai riippuen tilanteesta, arvo, jolla on paras
yleisvaikutus ääneen).
→ Varmista, että etäisyyksien asetukset ovat kaikille
kaiuttimille oikeat (katso Kaiuttimien etäisyydet,
sivu 32).
❖ Radiolähetyksissä on runsaasti kohinaa
→ Kytke antenni (sivu 14) ja aseta se parhaaseen
kohtaan vastaanottoa varten.
→ Vie kaikki irralliset johdot ja kaapelit kauas antennin
päistä ja johdosta.
→ Avaa DAB/FM-antenni kokonaan, sijoita se
parhaaseen kohtaan ja kiinnitä seinään (tai kytke FM-
ulkoantenni).
→ Sammuta tai tai vie kauemmaksi laitteet, jotka
aiheuttavat häiriötä (tai sijoita antenni kauemmas
näistä laitteista).
❖ Lähettäviä kanavia ei voi valita automaattisesti.
→ Kytke ulkoantenni (sivu 14).
❖ Kasettisoittimen soitossa on kohinaa.
→ Vie kasettisoitin tarpeeksi kauas vastaanottimesta ja
kohina katoaa.
❖ Ääntä ei kuulu tai kuuluu kohinaa soitettaessa
DTS-sisältöä.
→ Varmista, että soittimen asetukset ovat oikeat ja/tai
DTS-signaalin lähtö on päällä. Katso lisätietoja DVD-
soittimen ohjekirjasta.
36
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
7
Lisätietoa
❖ Kauttimien ja alataajuuskaiuttimen äänien välillä
on viive.
→ Katso Surroundäänen automaattiset asetukset
(sivu 16) ja tee uudestaan Full Auto MCACC, joka
automaattisesti kompensoi alataajuuskaiuttimen
viiveen.
❖ Full Auto MCACC:n jälkeen kaiuttimien kokoasetus
(LARGE tai SMALL) on väärin.
→ Ilmastointilaite tai moottori on saattanut aiheuttaa
matalataajuuksista kohinaa. Kytke pois kaikki sellaiset
laitteet huoneesta ja tee Full Auto MCACC uudestaan.
❖ Kaukosäädintä ei voi käyttää.
→ Vaihda paristot (sivu 7).
→ Käytä kaukosäädintä enintään 10 m etäisyydellä
sensorista (sivu 7).
→ Ota este pois sensorin edestä tai käytä säädintä
toisesta kulmasta.
→ Varo, ettei suora auringonvalo osu sensoriin.
❖ Näyttöruutu on pimeä.
→ Paina useita kertoja kaukosäätimen
DIMMER
ja
palauta oletuskirkkaus.
→ ECO-tilassa kirkkaus vaihtelee kahden arvon välillä.
Jos valittuna on himmein arvo, näytössä näkyy
DIMMER (muissa tiloissa kirkkauksia on neljä, ECO-
tilassa kaksi).
❖ Näyttöruutu välähtää ja valintoja ei voi tehdä.
→ Joillekin tulosignaaleille ja kuuntelutiloille on toimintoja,
joita ei voi valita.
❖ Langatonta BLUETOOTH-laitetta ei voi yhdistää
tai käyttää. BLUETOOTH-laite ei lähetä ääntä tai
äänessä on katkoksia.
→ Varmista, ettei lähettimen läheisyydessä ole
2.4 GHz sähkömagneettista säteilyä lähettävää
laitetta (mikroaaltouuni, lähiverkkolaite tai langaton
BLUETOOTH-laite). Vie tällaiset laitteet kauemmaksi
vastaanottimesta tai lopeta niiden käyttö.
→ Varmista, että langaton BLUETOOTH-laite on riittävän
lähellä vastaanotinta ja näiden välillä ei ole esteitä.
Etäisyyden tulee olla alle 10 m* ja välissä ei saa olla
esteitä.
* Etäisyyden maksimi on arvio. Todellinen kantama voi
riippua ympäristön olosuhteista.
→ Langaton BLUETOOTH-laite ei ehkä ole langatonta
viestintää tukevassa tilassa. Katso sen asetukset.
→ Varmista, että laitepari on muodostettu oikein tai että
parin asetuksia ei ole poistettu kummaltakaan laiteelta.
Muodosta laitepari uudestaan.
→ Varmista, että käyttöproili on oikea. BLUETOOTH-
laitteen tulee tukea A2DP-proilia.
HDMI
❖ Ei kuvaa tai ääntä
→ Jos ongelma jatkuu vaikka kytket HDMI-laitteen
suoraan televisioon, kysy lisätietoja molempien
laitteiden valmistajilta.
❖ Ei kuvaa.
→ Analogiseen videotuloon tulevaa kuvaa ei saa
lähtemään HDMI-lähdöstä, eikä HDMI-tuloon tulevaa
kuvaa analogisesta lähdöstä. Käytä samanlaisia
liintäntöjä tulevalle ja lähtevälle kuvalle.
→ Lähdekomponentin lähtöasetuksissa saattaa olla
videoformaatti, jota ei tueta. Vaihda lähtöasetus tai tee
kytkentä komposiittivideokaapelilla.
→ Vastaanotin on HDCP-yhteensopiva. Varmista,
että siihen kytketyt komponentit ovat nekin HDCP-
yhteensopivia. Jos ne eivät ole, tee kytkennät
komposiittivideokaapelilla.
→ Kytketty lähdelaite ei ehkä toimi tämän vastaanottimen
kanssa, vaikka se olisi HDCP-yhteensopiva. Tee silloin
kytkentä komposiittivideokaapelilla.
→ Jos TV:ssä ei näy kuvaa, kokeile resoluution
vaihtamista tai Deep Colorin tai muiden asetusten
vaihtamista.
→ Deep Color -signaalin toistamiseksi tee kytkentä High-
Speed HDMI -kaapelilla vastaanottimen ja Deep Color
-laitteen välillä.
❖ Näytössä ei näy valikkoruutuja (OSD, Home Menu
ym.).
→ OSD ei näy, jos kytkentä televisioon on tehty
komposiittivideokaapelilla. Kaytä HDMI-kytkentää.
❖ Ei ääntä tai ääni katkeaa äkillisesti
→ Varmista, että HDMI:n asetuksena on AMP (sivu 27).
→ Jos komponentti on DVI-laite, käytä äänelle erillistä
kytkentää.
→ HDMI-formaatin audiolähetyksen siirrron
tunnistamiseen kuluu hetki aikaa. Tästä syystä
äänessä voi olla katkos vaihdettaessa audion
formaatia tai soiton alussa.
→ Häiriöääniä tai audion katkos voi kuulua, jos soiton
aikana sammutetaan vastaanottimen HDMI OUT
-liitäntään kytketty laite tai irrotetaan sen kytkentäjohto.
Tärkeää tietoa HDMI-yhteydestä
Joissakin tapauksissa et voi reitittää HDMI-signaaleja
tämän vastaanottimen kautta. Tämä riippuu HDMI:llä
kytkettävien laitteiden ominaisuuksista. Kysy niiden
valmistajilta yhteensopivuuksista.
Jos et saa HDMI-signaalia kunnolla vastaanottimen
kautta, kokeile kytkentöihin seuraavaa kongurointia.
Kongurointi
Kytke HDMI-komponentti suoraan näyttöön HDMI-
kaapelilla. Tämän jälkeen hae kätevin tapa siirtää
audio vastaanottimeen (suositus: digitaalinen). Katso
audiokytkennöistä lisää käyttöohjeesta. Tällaisessa
konguraatiossa säädä näytön volyymi minimiin.
Huomio
• Laitteistosta riippuen audiokanavien määrä voi
olla rajoitettu näyttölaitteen mukaiseksi (esim.
stereomonitorista saadaan kaksikanavainen
audiolähtö).
• Jos haluat vaihtaa lähtötuloa, sinun on vaihdettava sekä
vastaanottimen että näyttölaitteen toiminnot.
• Koska HDMI-yhteyttä käytettäessä näytön ääni on
vaimennettu, sinun on säädettävä näytön volyymi
erikseen kullekin lähtötulolle.
USB-viestit
❖ USB Error 4 (I/U ERR 4)
→ USB-laite vaatii liikaa virtaa vastaanottimelta.
Sammuta vastaanotin ja kytke USB-laite uudestaan.
37
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
7
Lisätietoa
Laitteen nollaus
Tällä toimenpiteellä voit nollata kaikki asetukset tehtaan
oletusarvoihin. Käytä tähän etulevyn painikkeita.
1 Aseta vastaanotin valmiustilaan.
2 Pidä painettuna
BAND
ja paina ja pidä
STANDBY/ON
noin kahden sekunnin ajan.
3 Kun näyttöruudussa on RESET?, paina
AUTO
SURROUND/STREAM DIRECT
.
Näyttöruudussa on OK?
4 Varmista painamalla
ALC/STANDARD SURR
.
Näyttöön ilmestyy OK osoittamaan, että vastaanotin
on palautettu tehtaan asetuksiin.
Laitteen puhdistaminen
• Pyyhi pöly ja lika puhdistusliinalla.
• Jos pinta on likainen, käytä pehmeää liinaa kostutettuna
1/6 laimennetulla neutraalilla puhdistusaineella ja
melkein kuivaksi puristettuna. Kuivaa pehmeällä
liinalla. Älä käytä huonekaluille tarkoitettua vahaa tai
puhdistusainetta.
• Älä milloinkaan käytä tinneriä, bensiiniä, puhdistus-
suihkeita tai muita voimakkaita liuottimia laitteen
puhdistamiseen tai sen läheisyydessä, koska ne
saattavat vahingoittaa laitteen pintaa.
Tekniset ominaisuudet
Audio-osio
Antoteho
Etu, keski ja surround
.................130 W kanavalle (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1 %)
..... 100 W kanavalle (20 Hz–20 000 Hz, 8 Ω, 0,09 %)
Harmoninen kokonaissärö
. . . . . . . . . .0,06 % (20 Hz–20000 Hz, 8 Ω, 50 W/kanava)
Taajuusvaste (LINE pure Direct -tila)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz–100 kHz
+0
-3
dB
Taattu kaiuttimimien impedanssi . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ω–16 Ω
Tulo (sensitiivisyys/impedanssi)
LINE.............................200 mV / 47 kΩ
Signaali-kohinasuhde (HF-A-verkko, 1 kΩ shorted)
LINE...................................106 dB
Video-osio
Signaalitaso
Komposiitti.........................1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Viritinosio
Taajuuskaista ...................87,5 MHz–108 MHz
Antennitulo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Ω balansoimaton
Digitaalinen viritin ...........................DAB+
BLUETOOTH-osio
Versio . . . . . . . . . . . . BLUETOOTH Specication Ver. 3.0
Lähtö..............BLUETOOTH Specication Class 2
Arvioitu käyttökantama* ...................Noin 10 m
Taajuusalue .............................2,4 GHz
Tuettu BLUETOOTH-proili ...................A2DP
Tuettu koodekki ..........SBC (Subband Codec), AAC
* Etäisyys on arvio. Todellinen kantama riippuu
ympäröivistä olosuhteista.
Digitaalinen IN/OUT-osio
HDMI-liitäntä........................Type A (19-pin)
HDMI-lähdön tyyppi .....................5 V, 55 mA
USB-portti.......USB 2.0 FullSpeed (Type A) 5 V, 0,5 A
Sekalaista
Virtaliitin ................AC 220–240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Virrankulutus ..............................220 W
Valmiustilassa ............................0,3 W
Mitat ........ 435 mm (L) x 168 mm (K) x 320,5 mm (S)
Paino (ilman pakkausta) .....................8,0 kg
38
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
Lisätietoa
7
Additional information
7
7
38
2
35
4
Furnished Parts
Setup microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Dry cell batteries (AAA size IEC R03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DAB/FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Quick start guide
Safety Brochure
Note
•
Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
The BLUETOOTH
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
“Pioneer”, “PHASE CONTROL”, “MCACC” and “AUTO
LEVEL CONTROL” are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation,
and are used under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Mukana tulevat osat
Asennusmikrofoni
Kaukosäädin
Kuivaparistot, AAA-koko
DAB/FM-lanka-antenni
Pikaopas
Turvaohje
Huomio
• Laitteen ominaisuudet ja muotoilu voivat ilman erillistä
ilmoitusta muuttua tuotteen jatkokehittelyn yhteydessä.
39
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
Lisätietoa
7
Additional information
7
7
39
2
35
4
Software license notice
The licenses for the open source software used on this
product are shown below. For accuracy purposes, here we
have included the original texts (in English).
FreeRTOS V6.0.5
Copyright (C) 2009 Real Time Engineers Ltd.
The FreeRTOS.org source code is licensed by the modified GNU
General Public License (GPL) text provided below.
An exception to this license exists that can be applied should you wish
to use FreeRTOS in a work that includes commercial or proprietary code
without being obliged to provide source code for the proprietary
components. See the licensing section of
http://www.FreeRTOS.org for full details.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin
Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted
to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-
-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and
to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser
General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.
Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want
it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone
to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2)
offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If
the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must
be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program",
below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the
Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the
Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this
License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does
not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If id
entifiable
sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themsel
ves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those section
s when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Progra
m, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is t
o exercise the
right to control the distribution of derivative or collective w
orks based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a vol
ume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the te
rms
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three y
ears, to
give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of
physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-
readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the off
er to
distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anythin
g that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offerin
g access to
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this L
icense.
40
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
2
2
2
8
35
4
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
By connecting the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
surround speakers (SL/SR), and the subwoofer (SW), a 5.1 ch surround system can be
enjoyed.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.
Hints on the speaker placement
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
•
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
•
For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
•
If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.
•
If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
•
Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
•
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the
size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
•
The optimal positioning for surround speakers is just above ear height. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly
behind the listener than for home theater playback.
•
Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the
front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over
or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
120
120
SL
L
SW
C
R
SR
5.1 channel surround system:
7
Lisätietoa
7
Additional information
7
7
40
2
35
4
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you
under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein.You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do
not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence
you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended
to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain
countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Program under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to
it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever
published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to th
e
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by
the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and
reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE,
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free
software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to
attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it
does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or m
odify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
or (at
your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 0
2110-
1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice li
ke this when
it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for
details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under
certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program
into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications
with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser
General Public License instead of this License.
EOF
Корпорация О энд Пи
2-3-12, Яэсу, Чуо-ку, г. Токио, 104-0028, ЯПОНИЯ
<Germany>
Hanns-Martin-Schleyer-Straße 35, 47877 Willich, Germany
Tel: +49(0)2154 913222
<UK>
Anteros Building, Odyssey Business Park, West End Road, South Ruislip,
Middlesex, HA4 6QQ United Kingdom
Tel: +44(0)208 836 3612
<France>
6, Avenue de Marais F - 95816 Argenteuil Cedex FRANCE
Tel: +33(0)969 368 050
2-3-12 Yaesu, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0028 JAPAN
<U.S.A.>
18 PARK WAY, UPPER SADDLE RIVER, NEW JERSEY 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 1-201-785-2600 Tel: 1-844-679-5350
Register your product on
http://www.pioneer.eu (Europe)
“Pioneer” and “MCACC logo” are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation, and are used under license.
SN 29402912
© 2017 Onkyo & Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved.
© 2017 Onkyo & Pioneer Corporation. Tous droits de reproduction et de traduction réservés.
F1701-0
Rekisteröi tuotteesi
http://www.pioneer.eu
… 40


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Pioneer VSX-531D at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Pioneer VSX-531D in the language / languages: Finnish as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 10,27 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Pioneer VSX-531D

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - English - 41 pages

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - German - 41 pages

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - Dutch - 41 pages

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - French - 41 pages

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - Italian - 41 pages

Pioneer VSX-531D User Manual - Spanish - 41 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info